Home

Northern Modular Telephone Telephone User Manual

1. S the system requirements Refer to the separate Installation Guide 2 e co CD EM 1 a a 1 5 MIC LINE INPUT STEREO AUX OUT MONITOR OUT PHONES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MONITOR PHONES T XD amp X Oc XO X XD YAMAHA kag E ES x MODE F EMOTE NTERNA SGENE UNY WONTURA s 2 2 PAGE a CHANNEL Tow LOWED Henmo HGH S 9T EST EJ p g pu S CJ L page 18 5 STE m 5 O 18 9 16 man 17 24 MASTER cD gt o EB gt 6 K uc CD a X page 20 7 Channel Module Stereo Display Q Gain knob Display These adjust the input sensitivity level of head amp of This backlit LCD liquid crystal display displays various each MIC LINE INPUT over a range of 4 dB to 46 dB information for operation of the 01 X or DAW digital These are always set to control the level of the MIC LINE audio workstation In most of the displays this indicates inputs 1 8 regardless of the MIXER LAYER selection the functions and parameter values assigned to the channel The settings cannot be stored saved as a Scene Library knob directly beneath the indication in the display When using the Remote mode this conveniently allows you to set
2. Parameter Parameter No Title No Title LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING E G 0 5dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB G 35dB 10 00dB 3 5dB 0 0 dB e 25 Male Vocal 1 33 Bass Drum 3 eo F 190Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4 25 kHz 20 0 kHz D Q 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 Q 2 10 0 4 0 4 m PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 2 0 dB 5 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB G 0 0dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 26 Male Vocal 2 34 Snare Drum 3 F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 70 kHz F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4 25 kHz 4 00 kHz e Q 0 11 10 5 6 a 4 5 2 8 0 1 B PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF E e G 1 0dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB G 9 0dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 27 Female Vo 1 35 Tom tom 2 F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 00 kHz F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5 30 kHz 17 0 kHz ea Q 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 Q 4 5 1 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 7 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB G 45dB 130dB 4 5dB 2 5 dB 28 Female Vo 2 36 Piano 3 Tm F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz LG N Q 0 16 0 2 Q 8 10 9 c PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKI
3. No Preset Name Description No Preset Name Description Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the A variation on preset 20 You can also use it with an T pase attack created by the beater 21 A G Stroke 2 acoustic electric nylon string guitar 2 BassDrum2 PS a peak around 80 Hz producing a tight stiff 22 A G Arpeg 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars 23 A G Arpeg 2 A variation on preset 22 3 Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes snappy and rimshot sounds Use with trumpets trombones or saxes When used 4 Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock 24 Brass Sec with a single instrument try adjusting the HIGH or snare drum sound HIGH MID frequency 5 Tom tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a An EQ template for male vocals Try adjusting the long leathery decay 25 Male Vocal 1 HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the voice quality 6 Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending y the sparkling decay 26 Male Vocal 2 A variation on preset 25 7 High Hat Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high An EQ template for female vocals Try adjusting the 9 range 27 Female Vo 1 HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the voice quality Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high 8 Percussion range of instruments such as shakers cabasas 28
4. Ajuo saBeuey opns af u g va wosuais 8 ZHYZ 88 ZH196 YOO NPIOM Z ngor ge HH g ae HOLVTIIOSO QL ZHX2 88 ZH96 90 9pJ0M Lx 1 vid g va 703u3i8 LA JL HAS NO NO HOLINOW Gavosvo HOLINOW pg abed s UoHOUNY y ur m js Bou Sjequinu y 0 puodseuioo f suequinu eur al Gavosvo sna zH Tui Cu BONN 4 g ne H NI OFFS TWLIDIC SaNOHd T g 9 7 TIUS THON GavoSvo HOLINOW 0 Luy 3 8wN3 NI HOLINOW NIO3H3LS NYU 1 5 n 9e G lt 7 veer 3331 A o NNT 7 u ve gu z HRAN 527 e1n0 103u1a g E zl RG j ze 77 SIC e 8 X ZH lz 88 2H96 1fidNI Ngu Ne 3 xd va aim sngo34 obo ka 9L X ul ouojy Z 9 1no xnv o3uais e S d obo uononpei wep Q no ssoqsud ISE x Q a l 3 p w exnv NK K e H SOINWN D3UNVEF Lie LA NN Tdi Sm i z xnv A wxvoo Q YIHLIG z Z m e e o o e 100 O3H3Ls 7Y L910 g 7
5. FX T EFFECT 1 MeTER e 1 x AUX3 iz Qa o 2 1 LE u EFFECT FX gt 24 E n INSERT SEND 74 5 FX ul EFFECT 2 METER 9 AUX4 E E g 2 i Fea a EFFECT 4 Fx2 amp INSERT SEND 242__ x EFFECT is available in 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only 1 Wordclock 96kHz 88 2kHz 16 3 Studio Manager only NOTE L e If 88 2kHz 96kHz operation is enabled only one internal effect block is available Effect 1 Aux 3 For details about each Effect Type refer to page 125 for details about each Effect Parameter refer to page 126 e For an application example showing how to use the effects see page 57 01X Owners Manual Before Using 99 N D 4 pz L Reference Getting Started Appendix 31 Hulsp 910190 SS D 2 5 D N D rr E 3203J89J8H pauejs fura xipuaddy 32 Overview of the 01X Remote Control With mLAN MIDI transfer the 01X can be used to conrtol DAW digital audio workstation software such as Cubase SX Nuendo Sonar and Digital Performer as well as the Multi Part Editor for Yamaha MOTIF ES or MOTIF RACK program contained on the included CD ROM This powerful feature lets you control software programs by using knobs faders and buttons on the panel of the 01X rather than your computer s mouse and keyboard Because of the bi directional da
6. 1 V2 Multi Part Editor iai Acrobat Reader for MOTIF RACK for PDF Manual File exchange Software Effect we Program Change 01X Channel Module Commercially Pih avaliable mLAN c StudioManager Vocal Rack Synthesizer S Auto Connector Final Master E mLAN 5 o Driver Setup ex a e 5 amp USE MIDI mLAN Driver MIDI amp Audio mLAN mLAN J MIDI IN OUT Audio IN OUT L mm T 5 IEEE 1394 Connectors ral CD O Fire Wire i Link o o 2 e E 3 mLAN Connectors 1 2 E mLAN mLAN 01 X MIDI IN OUT Audio IN OUT mm em mLAN Audio Audio conversion S 3 3 E mLAN IN mLAN gt lt 1 16 STEREO IN 1 8 17 18 9 10 Program Change Transfer with Scene Selection Studio Manager Port 5 Port 4 STEREO RECBUS AUX 3 4 AUX 1 2 Direct OUT 1 24 Remote Control Mixer STI 1 n Dn AUXS Q3yx Daa S STI 2 rare rare T pgss Boss Y AUX GETII HL 9 MIDI B MIDI A MIC LINE IN OUT IN OUT DIGITAL DIGITAL STEREO MONITOR PHONES INPUT STEREO STEREO AUXOUT OUT 1 8 A D IN IN OUT MOTIF RACK 26 01X Owner s Manual Mixer Symbol Indications m Amplifier stage Kasa Value change via knob Value change via fader eii On off switch button Unconnected AD Analog Digital converter restes DA Digital Analog converter SHC sues Sampling rate con
7. m Input level Analog Input Connector 7 e Nominal Max before clip Input Impedance MIC LINE INPUT 1 2 XLR type Balanced 46 dB 4 dB 18 dB 3 kQ a 48 V 3 V 3 V Phantom amp MIC LINE INPUT 3 8 TRS Phone Balanced 46 dB 4 dB 418 dB 3 kQ MIC LINE INPUT Hi Z Phone Unbalanced 46 dB 4 dB 18 dB 500 kQ Output level EB Analog Output Connector m Nominal Max before clip Actual Load Impedance 2 MONITOR OUT L R Phone Unbalanced 10 dBV 4 dBV 10 kQ e STEREO AUX OUT L R Phone Unbalanced 10 dBV 4 dBV 10 kQ e PHONES TRS Phone Unbalanced 100 mW 100 mW 8 402 eo 40 Q load Digital Input Output Connector Format Recommended output level Other details D DIGITAL IN OUT RCA PIN IEC 60958 Consumer use 0 5 Vpp 75 Q SRC On Off is possible on e the input side Dither On Off possible on the output a side e MIDI IN OUT A B DIN 5 pin MIDI mLAN 1 2 IEEE 1394 6 pin IEEE 1394 FireWire amp FOOT SWITCH 1 2 PHONE E E Control E En Analog Input Gain LINE MIC Gain Knob 1 8 4 dB 46 dB E Section Monitor Volume MONITOR PHONES Knob Phantom Switch PHANTOM 48 V ON OFF rear panel Power Switch STANDBY ON switch rear panel Faders Faders 1 8 STEREO Fader 60 mm motorized 0 132 oodB gt Knobs Dial Channel knobs 1 8 Data Entry 3 Rotary Encoder Dial Song Position a en Panel Switches MODE INTERNAL REMOTE SCENE UTILITY BACK
8. ALII 00000000 9 Ll IHI Go oi ere al 991616919 01610 SIS p aj 9 9999 AME S Before beginning installation of mLAN Driver for Windows switch off the power to the 01X see the separate Installation Guide When powering down the setup first turn down the volume for each audio device then switch off each device in the reverse order audio devices first then MIDI Be sure to restart your DAW after restarting the 01X turning the power off and on again or switching the DAW in the Remote Select menu page 87 This applies when using SQ01 Cubase Nuendo or Digital Performer Turning on the 01X Power on Procedure Once you ve made all the necessary connections page 23 between your 01X and any other devices make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters senders MIDI slaves receivers then audio equipment mixers amplifiers speakers etc This ensures smooth signal flow from the first device to the last first MIDI then audio 01X Owner s Manual N CAUTION Before you switch your 01X on or off turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment Noise may be generated during the following operations Before performing these operations lower
9. BD elle HHEH HHEH L o oo Lama E mm Tal 000 T I GG TGI GB op eaagmoaou CODUDOCE i ees mm TT do P REMOTE button This button selects the Remote mode enabling you to con trol DAW digital audio workstation software on a con nected computer page 23 In this condition the MIXER LAYER buttons page 19 function according to their upper names AUDIO INST MIDI BUS AUX OTHER p INTERNAL button This button selects the Internal mode enabling normal internal operation of the 01X pages 37 85 In this condi tion the MIXER LAYER buttons page 19 function according to their lower names SCENE button This button selects the Scene mode enabling you to store and recall Scenes page 85 01X Owner s Manual MODE 17 e REMOTE INTERNAL SCENE UTILITY MONITOR A B E03 CT OUO PAGE e SELECTED EQ CHANNEL LOW LOW MID HIGF MID HIGH PAN SEND DYNAMICS GROUP EFFECT _ 25 l 2o S L O AUDIO INST Mibi BUS AUX OTHER 18 9 16 mw 17 24 T MASTER lt BANK K Orr m Q ra Ounvo LJ 0 0 0 Q C ocd
10. DIGITAL STEREO OUT MIC LINE INPUT 8 HI Z DIGITAL STEREO IN PHONES 00 00 00 00 Headphones Monitor system Wordclock Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another Even if both devices use identical sampling rates digital signals may not transfer correctly or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each other Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each other In a typical digital audio system one device operates as the wordclock master transmitting wordclock signals and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves synchronizing to the wordclock master If you are digitally connecting the 01X to other equipment you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves then set up all the devices accordingly The 01x can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44 1 kHz 48kHz 88 2 kHz Macintosh only or 96 kHz or slaved to an external wordclock source When mLAN is used the 01X s mLAN Auto Wordclock must be set to ENABLE page 92 NOTE e For information on installing the mLAN driver and
11. Function name F Related Block R Explanation Prompt E settings pages diagram E uw B EQ LIBRARY Common to 4 bands Selected Channel only PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V eo This can be called up by pressing the same EQ button twice in a row For example EQ LOW EQ LOW Ss e D 0 01 200 Determines the Library number Preset EQ numbers 01 40 see page 115 No 36 m Library number are indicated by asterisks in the display and cannot be changed 1j 14J Title Edit Determines the title name of the EQ Library No 41 e For calling up the selected EQ Library The confirmation prompt can be 5 RECALL Ye 4 e turned on off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page 95 idi 3 L 7 EQ settings are stored to internal memory in the EQ Library Up to 160 set tings can be stored The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired ES See Store Confirmation on page 95 6 STORE N CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the Store destination will be lost when executing the m Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com 5 puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 77 c 7 CLEAR This deletes the selected EQ Library Yes 99 c PAN INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL PAN PAN BALANCE PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v Enables adjustment of the pan setting of t
12. 139 Using Mute On Off Solo 51 Initial Input Patch Settings 139 Using Dynamics Output Patch Parameters s 140 applying compression etc eee ereer 52 Initial Output Patch Settings 140 Dynamics IGI OPI ee a 24 MIDI Data Format 141 Pairing channels sssssssss 54 Panning Me 55 MIDI Implementation Chart 142 Using the Internal Effects tee 56 Display NMessa ps 143 aiae Bn Troubleshooting 1111011 111rea 11ean 144 Input and Output Patching 61 Groups 64 Specifications eee e 149 Creating and Recalling Scenes 65 RG c LE E 151 01X Owners Manual ow wo a i 17 c a s L 39u 13 34 pauejs Bua uoi2ag soiseg xipuaddy Before Using 01X Terminology Digital Mixing Terms E Attenuator ATT After A D conversion input signals pre EQ level can be attenuated using this control This is used mainly in the EQ section to prevent the signal from clipping and to adjust the level so that fader of each channel can be operated around OdB See page 98 E AUX Stands for auxiliary These are alternate signal output destinations used to feed the two internal effects of the 01X or an external effect processor E Buses A signal route that mixes
13. PAN button This button calls up the display for the pan settings of each channel page 99 SEND button This button calls up the display for the AUX Send settings of each channel page 100 9 DYNAMICS button This button calls up the display for the Dynamics settings of each channel page 100 The parameters can be set in the Selected Channel mode the Multi Channel mode has only Dynamics on off switches 9 GROUP button This button calls up the display for assigning multiple channels to fader or mute groups and for pairing adjacent faders page 101 amp EFFECT button This button calls up the display for the effect settings of each channel page 102 MIXER LAYER 9 MIXER LAYER buttons In the Internal mode these are used to switch among input layers page 40 In the Remote mode they are used to switch among banks page 15 Controls and Connectors BANK FLIP SHIFT BANK 4 gt Left Right buttons These buttons are used to select the next previous layer page 40 or bank page 15 in groups of eight channels FLIP button When this button is set to on the functions of the channel knobs and the channel faders are switched To set both the faders and the channel knobs to control the channel knob function simultaneously hold down the SHIFT button and turn this button on the lamp flashes SHIFT button This button is used in combination with other buttons
14. ccscsssessessssessecsececceessecsseeneeneeneens 123 Threshold Gate and Ducking eee 124 Title Edit Basics Section ssssssssseeeeeenees 41 Top Panel 16 TOUGM 15 Touch in Touch out 01X Terminology 15 Transport icc cere one ei D BO Yr ir Eae ERE r EUREN ES 74 Troubleshooting i rrr ernannt retro e ending 144 Turni on the OIX rec rt eter rene E ENE 24 TWE Wave Editor cor otro er ro Fe s 9 U Bo 83 UNDO DIOM incra ni oce nimm etatis 19 Using Mute On Off 5 2 otGrecreerirm imp cea Aaa 51 U TIEEITY b ttoli 2 2 roin ai 18 UTIEITY MODE nesie a G T 86 V Vocal RACE aote veterea bnt ebat e it ses 9 W KM CLK eTel e D 92 W CLK SELECT Wordclock Select ssssss 92 WAVEFORM 35 s unie eie RR OU Ore ase 93 WHITE NOISE 5 6 90 hei n E eere NE 93 Width Conmipander 5 edet eet rete acr ares 123 KAS el Loe du E 92 KOST IS Tea e T ais ter DRESSER E RESIE ENSE EI EUST 92 Working in an Editor window see 76 Working in the Mixer window een 75 Working in the Project window sse 73 Wiite protect 552i n eere nei rh SUA P REO OI ERE 86 01X Owner s Manual qoux S3NOHd AHOLINOW Xew uw eougjeg XIN gv YOLINOW
15. 29 Knobs 1 8 on page 2 and later Edits each of the parameters 18 29 INSTRUMENT mode SHIFT SEND Global mode only Knob 1 on page 1 only Changes the Slot Number Knob 2 on page 1 only Turns the software tone generator on or off Knobs 1 8 on page 2 and later Edits each of the parameters 18 No function AUDIO INST MIDI BUS AUX OTHER Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 109 uoi2ag saiseg Buisp 910199 ER TETETETT pauejs uyay xipuaddy Remote Function List Bl SONAR On the 01X set Remote Select page 87 in the Utility mode to SONAR Button Function LED quem 4 In all modes NAME VALUE Changes the indication of the parameter name and its value SHIFT NAME VALUE Turns the Meter indication on or off 19 DISPLAY v Multi Channel Changes the parameter to be edited via a Knob in order one by one Herr ne aed d Changes the parameters to be edited via a Knob in groups of eight renn P ANNEL Changes the indicated parameter in order one by one ICELECTEDEHANNBO USA Changes the indicated parameters in groups of eight SHIFT REMOTE ee pa Em for Multi Part Editor Remote operation Press REMOTE button to can flaches 5 SE
16. The Multi Channel mode on the other hand is for viewing and changing the on off status of Dynamics for all channels 4 From the Selected Channel mode press the DYNAM ICS button to select the desired displays The first contains the Dynamics parameters the second contains the Dynamics library page 54 Example Compressor Dynamics Parameter page See pages 118 124 Threshold Ratio Attack Release Gain Knee Dynamics Library page See pages 100 118 l 1 l 2 l 3 l 4 l 5 l 6 l 7 8 5 Adjust the desired Dynamics parameter by turning the corresponding knob Mixing Tutorial Compressor parameters ranges Threshold Determines the amount of signal necessary to trigger compression Any signal softer than this level passes through unprocessed while signals louder than the Threshold are compresses at the specified Ratio below Range 54 0 0 0 Ratio Determines the amount of compression or the change in output relative to the change in input A 1 1 ratio rep resents no compression or normal unity gain output is the same as input A 2 1 ratio means that for a 10dB change in input level the output changes only by 5dB Higher ratios obviously result in greater level squash ing For vocals piano and bass a range between 2 1 and 6 1 is commonly used Greater ratios are used on drums and guitars and for special effects Range 1 1 1 Attack Det
17. E System Backup NOTE Backup 1 page 86 e The 01X Utility and Monitor settings are lost when the power is turned off unless System Backup is Utility The current Scene Channel performed In order to ensure the settings here EQ Dynamics Effect are effective the next time you turn the 01X on Monitor settings Input Patch Output Patch perform System Backup by holding SHIFT and pressing UTILITY page 86 Settings are compatible For details about each Preset mLAN See the Studio Manager Library parameter refer to the PDF manual Appendix section Studio Manager Settings are compatible See the 01X Channel Module PDF manual 01X Channel Module 3B 01X Owner s Manual Basic Operations Basic Operations In this section you ll learn about the structure of the modes of the 01X its panel display indications and its fun damental operations Modes REMOTE button MODE REMOTE INTERNAL button INTERNAL SCENE UTILITY SCENE button MONITOR A B UTILITY button MONITOR A B button Selected Display Related Mode LED Operation Settings Selecting a mode example Indications Channel page 38 pages REMOTE GENERAL SQ01 REMOTE lights Remote Control of the computer
18. 4 DISPLAY A V UTILITY D Channel Module Name Part Track Name Level adjusted via Channel faders 3 Channel channel name or selected channel channel name assigned to the respective module CH1 8 Input Channlel 1 8 mL1 16 Input Channel 9 24 mLAN Input Channel 1 16 BUS REC Bus AUX1 4 AUX Bus 1 4 ST1 2 Stereo Input Channel 1 2 4 Mode 8 Parameter function name 6 Settings selected by turning channel knobs Function or operation selected by pressing channel knobs Page number Currently selected settings Display name EFFECT DISPLAY A V EFFECT2 DISPLAY A V For information about UTILITY OSC ASSIGN display also see page 93 Channel name can be edited by using the Studio Man ager Refer to the PDF manual 01X Owners Manual Before Using 99 N D 4 pz S Reference Getting Started Appendix 39 Basic Operations Layer selection Channel selection The Input Channels and Output Channels are arranged into layers as illustrated below There are four layers altogether usn 910199 SS MUU i D n o N D e Input Channel Layer 1 8 D Input Channel Layer 9 16 mLAN1 mLAN8 a co S l Input Channel Layer el 17 24 mLAN9
19. a N D tr E 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Overview of the 01X Input channel Input channels 1 through 8 These are monaural input channels used mainly for input of microphones or line level instruments The signals that are input to input channels 1 through 8 pass through an attenuator phase switch 4 band EQ and dynamics proces sor and are sent to the stereo bus AUX buses 1 through 4 and Rec bus Input channels 1 through 8 also have a direct output DIRECT OUT which allows them to be sent directly from mLAN outputs Input channels 9 through 24 mL1 through mL16 These are input channels for the signal from mLAN IN Each of these channels is structured the same as the input channels When the 01X is set to 88 2kHz Macintosh only 96kHz operation mLAN input from computer to the 01X is limited to 8 channels 9 16 mL1 mL8 NOTE L Faders and most parameters of adjacent odd even channels are linked for stereo operation page 102 a da at oo TET NN aa oo ES 29 gg _ St Ba UE ss gu HB NNNN Ce nn IIE INPUT 1 8 T METER x INSERT e I ON LEVEL Ln 2L ie 3 n ay T S e b 4BAND EQ wins t Y N IMETER PRE POST ON AUX 9 Gain Reduction T 9ee y i 4 9 9 u Mono in X 8 Poe T E ose p DIRECT z o O
20. sss pages 16 46 s the fader of the input channel or stereo input channel or stereo output channel raised to an appropriate level Is the channel turned on page 99 s the input output patching set correctly pages 88 90 91 s the wordclock setting correct for both the 01X and the external device s us page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Wordclock Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Is the attenuator of the EQ raised pages 97 98 The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value ert beo sts e dn been pages 96 97 98 The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme threshold or ratio pages 100 122 f you are connecting an electric guitar is it connected to the Hi Z jack eee page 21 When using SQ01 Make sure that Disable Audio select Audio from the Setup menu in the Track View window is off unchecked SQO01 Online Manual When using SQ01 When the application is closed in the con dition that the sampling wave frequency of SQ01 is set to 48kHz then is connected with the mLAN Auto Connector with a setting other than 48kHz a message appears when starting SQO1 indicating that the audio device cannot be used Make sure to set Disable Audio to off select Audio from the Setup menu in the Track View window SQO1 Onl
21. 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section 923 s N D d gt Reference Appendix 4 Mixing Tutorial usn 910199 uoi2ag soiseg o 1 E K N o m 1 25 a9uaJajay xipuaddy 48 Applying EQ EQ stands for equalizer or equalization and lets you change the tonal characteristics of the audio The 01X is equipped with a four band sweepable parametric EQ for maximum versatility and control EQ Tips Keep in mind EQ has three main uses in recording and mixing Optimizing the sound for recording reducing unwanted noise and hum compensating for poor fre quency response reducing leakage between instru ments etc Optimizing the balance in mixdown cutting the low frequencies in a keyboard part to have it blend better with a bass part etc Applying special effects or enhancements such as creating a telephone voice or boosting the bass on a vocal to make it sound richer You may need to use EQ to get a good sound in record ing However remember that some anomalies and deficiencies in the sound can be corrected at the source e g changing microphone placement or micro phones etc Also it s tempting to use EQ liberally during mixdown However applying a lot of EQ boost may cause distor tion especially if done on several channels at once Moreover using too much EQ can make a mix sou
22. 1 3 5 Attack ms 8 Attack ms 7 7 A Dr SN COMP Out gain dB 35 17 E Guitar COMP Out gain dB 25 Knee 2 Knee 4 Release ms 12 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 23 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 0 Attack ms 5 8 A Dr SN EXPAND Out gain dB 05 18 A Guitar COMP Out gain dB 15 Knee 2 Knee 2 Release ms 151 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 8 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 1 7 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 11 Attack ms 33 9 A Dr SN COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 19 Strings1 COMP Out gain dB 15 Width dB 10 Knee 2 Release ms 128 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 20 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 2 Attack ms 93 10 A Dr Tom EXPAND Out gain dB 50 20 Strings2 COMP Out gain dB 15 Knee 2 Knee 4 Release ms 749 Release ms 1 35 S Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owners Manual 1 1 g Parameter Lists No Title Type Parameter Value No Title Type Parameter Value c3 Threshold dB 17 Threshold dB 33 Ratio 1 1 5 Ratio 1 2 Attack
23. A S AD8 mL8 mL1 mL9 AUX3 4 1 2 23 24 8 17 18 23 24 are mL8 mL16 available in 48kHz mL9 mL17 ume 44 1kHz mode only _ Wordclock mL16 mL24 48kHz 44 1kHz only The Output Patch settings made here can be stored to the Output Patch Library page 91 90 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name F Related Block R Explanation Prompt c settings pages diagram E C 6 OUTPUT PATCH DIGI ST AUX OUT PORT 2 o The 01X s Stereo Bus Out Rec Bus Out Aux Out 1 through 4 signals can be patched to any output jacks by using these Output Patch parameters also see page 30 Select the signals for Digital Out or STEREO AUX OUT here Turning the knob immediately changes the routing NOTE ST BUS RECBUS To set stereo pairs for AUX 1 4 simultaneously hold down the SEL button us D AUX1 4 corresponding to one of the desired AUX numbers and press the SEL button No N e o D OUT Digital Out of the intended pair odd even numbers This links the parameters and lets e you use the AUX outs in stereo page 102 a OUTPUT PATCH E ITANE A Sen ase our S axor TH ST BUS RECBUS a rara T E ST AUXOUT m 5 o cc The same output signal can be simultaneously routed to multiple output channels jacks The Output Patch settings made here can be sto
24. F8 01X Owners Manual 1 1 3 uoi2ag soiseg Huisp 910199 ER TETETETT pauejs fura xipuaddy Remote Function List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 The normal condition is when the AUTO R W SOLO and REC RDY button lamps are off Not used or operable for the Master channel The Multi Part Editor must be selected as the MIDI editor in SQ01 V2 This is done from the Track view window by selecting Set gt Remote Control Only PAN is available in the R settings The GNRL RMT General Remote setting must be selected with the SHIFT REMOTE function in Utility page 87 The mute of the Master channel will be released This does not reflect on the LED of the Master channel When the AUTO R W button is lit the ON button of only the selected channel is lit The LED lights when the appropriate track object is shown in the Global View mode When EQ 1 4 are being edited the LED of each EQ button LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH is lit When the Track Parameter view is active all four EQ buttons are lit The following are not displayed on the 01X Track Slot Plug in EQ DYN Send and Effect number This sometimes does not function in Nuendo This does not function when a channel is being soloed When the AUTO R W button is lit the ON button of only the selected channel is
25. This calls up the Editor window for the selected part in this case the Key Editor window 4 Use the lt gt Left Right cursor buttons to select notes in the part Each press of a button not only selects the previous next note it plays it as well letting you check the sound 5 Use the A V Up Down cursor buttons to move the note up or down in pitch This is a convenient and quick way to change the pitch of individual notes It s also especially useful in drum tracks letting you hear the change in sound as you make it 6 To close the Editor hold down SHIFT and press CLOSE F4 Alternately you could call up another window using the TRACK or MIXER buttons if you want to keep the Editor window active in the background Audio parts Sample Editor window You can also call up the Sample Editor window for audio parts in the same way Use the cursor buttons as described above to select the desired audio part then press the EDIT button to call up the Sample Editor Although all transport controls function normally no actual wave edit ing can be done from the 01X panel Recording Playback Remote Control Automation Continuous automation using Auto Read Write This is one of the most powerful of the control surface fea tures of the 01 X Not only does it let you automate your sequencer mixes in coordination with the 01X all physical fader moves are completely automated
26. e Outputting only the stereo output of the 01X to Monitor Out or headphones sese MONITOR pages 37 96 e Assigning the stereo bus Rec bus and Aux bus signals to the desired mLAN outputs OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL page 90 Selecting which signals stereo bus Rec bus Aux bus 1 2 or Aux bus 3 4 are to be output via the DIGITAL STEREO OUT terminal sss OUTPUT PATCH DIGI ST AUX OUT PORT page 91 Selecting which signals stereo bus Rec bus Aux bus 1 2 or Aux bus 3 4 are to be output via the STEREO AUX OUT terminals sss OUTPUT PATCH DIGI ST AUX OUT PORT page 91 Directly outputting the input channel signals 1 8 and 9 24 mLAN via the output terminals channels OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL DIGI ST AUX OUT PORT pages 90 91 Selecting which signal is to be used for Direct Out pre EQ pre fader or post fader sss OUTPUT PATCH DIRECT OUT POSITION page 91 B Digital In Out e Enabling disabling cascade connection of the DIGITAL IN to the stereo bus sss D IN ST BUS CASCADE page 93 e Setting the attenuation level when connecting the DIGITAL IN to the stereo bus D IN ST BUS CASCADE ATT page 93 e Enabling disabling conversion of the sampling rate of the signal received at DIGITAL IN SRC Sampling rate converter page 93 Enabling disabling dithering of the digital audio intentionally addi
27. recording operations on the DAW software by using the Remote Control function and features synchronized oper ation of the mixer functions on the DAW and fader opera tions on the 01X The particular methods of recording automation data differ depending on the DAW The fol lowing terms are examples from SQOI e Touch Only data of fader or knob operations is recorded e Latch Fader and knob operations are recorded from the start until the song stops E Bank This refers to a group of channels that can be simulta neously controlled from the panel This is the DAW equiv alent for mixing layers in the Internal mode Groups of eight channels on the DAW software can be selected for mixing just as the layer groups 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 are selected on the 01X For details refer to the Remote Function List on page 104 Bi Moving faders This describes faders that automatically move to recorded positions as they are recalled for example when select ing a different mixing layer channel group or recalling a Scene from memory On the 01X all nine faders includ ing the ST channel are moving faders This is very conve nient since the faders move according to the parameter changes during automation playback providing visual confirmation of the mixdown status Also called motor ized faders 01X Terminology ii Touch in Touch out In automation the initial movement of a fader is referred to as touch in
28. reo input channel e R indicates the right channel pan settings of the stereo input channel Basic Operations Entering Characters Title Edit You can freely name the stored Library The following data types can be named Scene Library page 85 Input Patch Library page 89 Output Patch Library page 91 EQ Library page 99 Dynamics Library page 100 Effect Library page 103 Channel Library page 103 The instructions below apply to naming of any of the Libraries NOTE L Library titles are named after the Libraries themselves have been stored This operation only saves the data of the Library name Other setting data is not saved until you actually store the Library pages 50 54 D Turn any of the channel knobs 1 4 to select the desired Library number for naming 2 Press any of the channel knobs 1 4 to edit the first position of the name The first character of the name flashes NOTE L To cancel the operation press channel knob 7 EXIT 3 Turn any of the channel knobs 2 4 to move the cur sor to the desired position NOTE L Keep in mind that turning channel knob 1 exits from the title edit operation 01X Owners Manual 41 Before Using 2 99 N D 4 pz S Reference Getting Started Appendix Buis 910199 SS D 2 5 a N D rr E 32u919J9H pauejs fura xipuadd
29. with or without the others Mute lets you turn off a channel allowing you to hear what the rest of the mix sounds like without it Solo works the opposite way letting you instantly turn off all channels except the selected one allowing you to hear that channel all by itself Remember that both Mute and Solo can be used with sev eral channels not just one The Solo function depends on the SOLO MODE setting page 96 In other words you can solo two channels to hear how they sound separate from the mix and hear how they sound together Or if you have drums on three different channels you can mute all three to hear a drum less mix Moreover you can use Mute with the Group feature page 101 to instantly mute several grouped channels all at the same time e f while mixing you cannot hear one or more channels make sure you haven t inadvertently used Mute or Solo For a quick visual check make sure that all channel LEDs are lit and that the SOLO button is off Mixing Tutorial Mute E Operation D Make sure that the SOLO button lamp is off Press SOLO if necessary to turn it off 2 Press the ON button of the desired channel The lamp turns off indicating the channel is muted Continue to mute other channels as desired in the same way 8 To un mute the channel press the ON button again Solo E Operation D Press the SOLO button The lamp lights and the ON button lamps all flash 2
30. 1 5sec Level display is shown 8 FADER LEVEL DISP Determines whether the Level value is shown or not when a channel fader is No 38 Fader Level Display moved 01X Owners Manual 95 Function Tree Function List Function name F Related Block R Explanation Prompt c L settings pages diagram c 4 SOLO MODE c 2 When using the Solo function with the ON button SOLO button is on MIX SOLO e LAST SOLO this determines whether multiple channels can be soloed MIX SOLO or only No the last selected channel is soloed LAST SOLO 5 SOLO SAFE co o Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when a 11 81 ENABLE other Input Channels are soloed Solo Safe function Signals from Input No e Channels that are set to ENABLE are always fed to the Stereo bus regardless 2 of the channels Solo function status o x MON Monitor UTILITY Channel knob 8 1 MONITOR Monitor Mix Balance PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V c e The audio signals of the last two available channels the last two numbered S channels specified with mLAN Auto Connector refer to the separate Installa a A LED ON tion Guide from the DAW which are input to the 01X mLAN channels 17 18 3 4 INT gt 0 126 lt DAW or 9 10 when set to 96kHz 88 2kHz operation are output direct
31. 42 3s fs 48kHz 3ms 23 0s fs 88 2kHz 3ms 21 1s fs 96kHz 01X Owners Manual 131 uoi 2ag soiseg BuisQ 910199 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 132 Parameter Lists DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger Parameter Range Description SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY T Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6ms 46 0s fs 44 1kHz 5ms 42 3s DYNA PHASER fs 48kHz 3ms 23 0s fs 88 2kHz 3ms 21 1s fs 96kHz Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Parameter Range Description SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY T Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase
32. 5 Transmit Channel T PS No 87 1 16 change messages PUE GTI Determines the MIDI Receive channel for receiving MIDI program change Receive Channel z prog 8 No 87 1 16 messages 3 PROGRAM CHANGE 5 TX ON OFF Enables ON or disables OFF transmission of Program Change messages No 87 Transmit On Off from the 01X Also see Program Change Assign Table below RX ON OFF Enables ON or disables OFF reception of Program Change messages on 6 Receive On Off the OLX from an external device Also see Program Change Assign Table No 87 below Determines whether program change messages are received over all MIDI 7 MNI ON OFF p N 7 9 nie channels or not Also see Program Change Assign Table below d S 4 PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE This determines the assignment of program change number to Scene number In other words it allows you to specify which MIDI program change number PGM Program Change sent via an external device selects which Scene on the 01 X When a Scene is Qo Number recalled on the 01X the Program Change number assigned to that Scene is No 87 1 128 transmitted Program change messages are sent and received over ort itted Prog hang g d ived mLANP 5 Make sure to set the SHIFT REMOTE function to NO ASSIGN when transmitting receiving program change data Scenes 01 99 are assigned by default to program change numbers 1 99 in order and Scene 00 initial setting is assigned to progr
33. Appendix Function Tree Function List Function name Related Block R Explanation Prompt c L settings pages diagram S D 5 OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL c z The 01X s Stereo Out Rec Bus Out Aux Out 1 through 4 signals can be e patched to any mLAN output channels by using these Output Patch parameters also see page 30 Turning the knob immediately changes the routing The ST BUS 1 2 23 24 same output signal cannot be simultaneously routed to multiple mLAN output 8 17 18 23 24 are channels In the default settings the direct out signal of the input channel is No 30 s available in 48kHz assigned to the corresponding mLAN output channel 62 2 44 1kHz mode only a c e OUTPUT PATCH Si 3 mLAN Channel sequence 1 2 E mLAN Channel sequence zx 1 2 23 24 8 amp 17 18 23 24 are No 30 co available in 48kHz FAN Channel sequence 62 5 6 44 1kHz mode only D 2 ame DH e ES mLAN Channel sequence 23 24 z AUX1 2 1 2 23 24 8 23 17 18 23 24 are available in 48kHz l l l No S 44 1kHz mode only The direct out setting for a specific channel see chart below is cancelled 62 if the corresponding output channel is assigned to a bus here Direct out settings when Stereo Out Rec Bus Out and Aux Out are not assigned to an mLAN pair em Hardware Input mLAN Output Channel I AD1 mL1 D
34. LAN eae LL rae Remote Funetion Lil i SOOT BL a E 104 Application examples eee 34 Parc po MEM NR ON 106 1 Recording mixer and monitor mixer 34 Cubase NUENDO 0 scssssssseessssssssssseeeseseeseee 108 2 Digital mixer function e 35 SONAR 110 3 EIS Digital Performer iusticie 112 software and Studio Manager 35 Memory Library Structure 36 Appendix 115 Basic Operations eee 37 Parameter Lists 115 Decr c M 37 Preset EQ Library u 115 Mode selection and display indications 38 Preset EQ Parameters Values 116 Layer selection Channel selection 40 EQ Parameters erret tnde tnnn 117 Entering Characters Title Edit N Preset Dynamics Library ss sessiiessiiesiree1rees 118 Factory Set Restore Factory Defaults 42 Preset Dynamics Parameters Values fs244 1KHz oeccecccscssessesesesessesssssesesseeseeees 119 Dynamics Parameters ssuses 121 Getting Started 43 Preset Effects Library see 125 Mixing Tutonial ccc cece ccsceteeeeeneneee 46 Effects Parameters eee eee eee 126 Setting input levels and viewing the meters 46 Scene Memory to Program Change Table 138 Applying EQ oeste aberat Erase 48 Input Patch Parameters
35. On the 01X set Remote Select page 87 in the Utility mode to LOGIC EB Notes Button Function LED page 114 In all modes Ei NAME VALUE Changes the indication of the parameter name and its value amp SHIFT NAME VALUE Changes the meter display mode PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v Cursor v Multi Channel View Changes the Slot number Parameters other than PAN NSTRUMENT E mode E 2 SHIFT REMOTE Enters the mode for Multi Part Editor Remote operation Press REMOTE button to can flashes 5 A cel the mode e SEL in normal status Selects a channel lights goes out 1 2 ES flashes SEL SEL flashes Fader touch out page 15 goes out SEL AUTO EDIT lights Fader touch in page 15 flashes ON in normal status Turns each channel off or on mutes unmutes the signal lights goes out um E SHIFT ON in normal status Turns all the channels on lights 1 2 6 7 ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for each channel to on or off lights goes out b a SHIFT ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for all channels to off excepting the master channel goes out 2 s ON REC RDY lights Sets the REC RDY of each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 Di SHIFT ON REC RDY lights Sets REC RDY for all channels to off excepting the master channel goes out
36. SAVE Executes the Save operation lights E a MARKER Turns the Marker on or off gt e SHIFT MARKER Enters the Marker Option mode o em Press to continuously rewind Press repeatedly to rewind more quickly When the Marker ES lt lt is turned on this operation moves the song position to the previous Marker When Nudge is turned on this operation moves the current object Press to continuously fast forward Press repeatedly to fast forward more quickly When gt gt the Marker is turned on this operation moves the song position to the next Marker When Nudge is turned on this operation moves the current object S m Press to stop recording or playback Pressing this when playback is stopped goes to the u B top of the song N gt Press to start playback lights Press this to start recording The K Play and 8 Rec lamp are turned on during 6 e a lights ca recording ZOOM Turns Zoom on and off lights FOOT SWITCH 1 Playback Stop uc FOOT SWITCH 2 Punch in Punch out g Dial Scrub playback Moves the song position See SCRUB below amp SCRUB Turns Scrub on and off When Scrub is on the dial can be used for Scrub playback lights c When Scrub is off the dial is used to move the song position 9 PAN mode PAN Multi Channel View fants 08 D PAN gt PAN Track Parameter View of PAN SURROUND 9 ce DISPLAY A v Cursor lt gt Changes the parameter to be edited Mult
37. When not using the mLAN driver it can be set to OFF from mLAN Manager you can turn on or enable the above mentioned software again R Sound recorded via the digital input sounds grainy Is the dither setting appropriate page 93 E Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud A conventional line level signal may be connected to the Hi Z I T page 21 E Not all tracks will record play back s the number of channels for mLAN audio receiving sending set on the mLAN Auto Connector and mLAN Graphic Patch bay appropriate Pared Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual E Can t save to a library Is the scene library protected page 86 tis not possible to save to the factory preset libraries sees page 36 E Can t reproduce a scene One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe page 86 E The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate ow ee pages 100 122 e Automation Automix may have been recorded page 15 Troubleshooting E Level does not change even when moving the fader Have the appropriate mode and layer been selected arisan zaraa goen pages 37 40 Make sure the fader is not set to PRE FADER in the AUX settings cicer etn page 100 Has the FLIP function been turned on p
38. When you restore the factory default settings all the settings for the all the Libraries and Utility will be overwritten with the fac tory defaults Make sure you are not overwriting any important data You should backup any important data to your computer beforehand by using Studio Manager For more details on using Studio Manager see page 47 and the Studio Manager PDF man ual CD Turn the power of the 01X off Then while holdin D 8 down the SCENE and UTILITY buttons turn the power back on The display prompts you for confirma tion AM STANDBY ON SCENE UTILITY 2 e To cancel the operation press channel knob 8 NO 2 Press channel knob 7 YES to execute the operation N CAUTION e Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being writ ten to Flash ROM while an Initializing backup data please keep power on message is shown Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM Getting Started E Sound Mixing 101 The Fundamentals Mixing is a skill but it s also an art Making a good recording and creating a good mix is more than simply plugging in a microphone and moving a couple of faders In this section you ll learn some of the basics of mixing from setting up to tips on how to use effects and how to use the 01X to create a well balanced mix For absolute mixing neophyte
39. YAMAHA I DIGITAL MIXING STUDIO Om Owner s Manual N CAUTION Before using the 01X be sure to read PRECAUTIONS on Application Index Page 10 4 5 pages 4 5 Troubleshooting Page 144 The included CD ROMs contain supplementary software page 9 and the following manuals Studio Manager Owner s Manual PDF Vocal Rack Owner s Manual PDF Q01 V2 for Windows online manual Final Master Owner s Manual PDF 01X Channel Module Owner s Manual PDF TWE Owners Manual PDF Pitch Fix Owner s Manual PDF Multi Part Editor for MOTIF RACK Owners Manual PDF For details refer to the separate Installation Guide SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply adapter DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual on the name plate or specifically recommended by Yamaha WARNING Do not place this product in a position where any one could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or con necting cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recommended If you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current handling capacity For longer extension cords consult a local electrician This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or
40. dB 15 Decay ms 331 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 19 Threshold dB 20 Range dB B2 Ratio 1 2 5 38 Ducking DUCKING Attack ms 93 Attack ms 31 Hold ms 1 208 sal aia SIME Out gain dB 2 0 Decay ms 6 32 S Knee 1 Threshold dB 11 Release ms 342 Range dB 53 Threshold dB 8 39 A Dr BD GATE Attack ms 0 Ratio 1 2 5 Hold ms 1 93 Attack ms 26 Decay ms 400 llis GOME Out gain dB 15 Threshold dB Knee 3 Range dB 23 Release ms 331 40 A Dr SN GATE Attack ms 1 Threshold dB 9 Hold ms 0 63 Ratio 1 1 7 Decay ms 238 Attack ms 39 30 Chorus COMP Out gain dB 25 Knee 2 Release ms 226 120 01X Owner s Manual E Dynamics Parameters Parameter Lists Threshold 54 dB 0 dB 0 1 dB step E Ratio x 1 X21 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 8 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 o 16 points 5 Out gain O dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step Knee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points E Compressor Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points O 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz Release 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz 5 3 ms 21 2 s 160 points 96 kHz D Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step b Ratio x 1 x21 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 o 16 points 8 Out gain O dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step 6
41. 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time FB G2 99 to 99 Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter RING MOD Two input two output ring modulator Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth 130 01X Owner s Manual MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter Parameter Lists Parameter Range Description E FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed g DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth z PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees Left channel modulation and right channel modulation phase difference ED TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance LE
42. 10 kHz Noise 0 dB 96 dB 1 dB step Can be output to Stereo Bus Rec Bus Aux 1 4 Output Stereo Bus 2 ch Stereo one system Rec Bus 2 ch Stereo one system Aux Bus 2 ch Sends 1 2 Effect Bus 2 ch Sends 3 4 combined use with Aux 3 4 Direct Output 24 ch mLAN output from Input Module x 24 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 ch 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Effector 2 units 43 preset types 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 1 unit 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Channel MIC LINE Input 24 systems A D Input x 8 ch mLAN Input x 16 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Module mLAN Input 16 systems A D Input x 8 ch mLAN Input x 8 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Attenuator Phase Insert 4 Band EQ Dynamics Aux Send 1 4 Level Pan Stereo Input Two systems 44 1 kHz 48 kHz One system 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Attenuator Phase 4 Band EQ Aux Send 1 4 Level Pan Output Stereo Output Attenuator 4 Band EQ Dynamics Insert Level Pan balance Module Rec Bus Output Dynamics Insert Level Aux 1 4 Output Level Interface Functions mLAN Audio F 18 ch Input 24 ch Output 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 10 ch Input 16 ch Output 88 2 kHz 96 kHz MIDI I F 5 ports Input 5 ports Output for DAW MIDI A MIDI B Studio Manager and Program Change Control Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 149 Specifications Input Output Specifications
43. 2 s 160 points 96 kHz Threshold 54 dB O0 dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 dB O0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points O 44 1 kHz Hold 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz o Gate 0 01 ms 1 07 s 216 points 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 980 ms 216 points 96 kHz 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s Decay l 160 points 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 2 s 160 points O 96 kHz 01X Owners Manual 121 uoi2ag saiseg Huisp 910199 3203J89J8H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Parameter Lists 7 Explanations for Dynamics Parameters Compressor A P4 A compressor provides a form of automatic level control By attenuating high 20 P x i 10 Compression ratio 2 1 levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the z 10 dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore gt Threshold 20dB c S i 20 A MM i i improving the signal to noise performance E 30 Knee hard i O 404 i i 50 4 60 4 70 D o LT T T T i T i T 5 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 O 10 20 Input Level Compressor CMP parameters Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the thresh old If the release
44. 3 One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates E Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio zs LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio A DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread 2 DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Cz E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb 2 E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections e HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed ER HOLD N Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed pi 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s fs 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms fs 96 kHz E 2 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz zh amp EARLY REF One input two output early reflections D Parameter Range Description E TYPE erba dca Type of early reflection simulation E ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing KD LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection sp
45. 6 06 49 49 92 92 7 07 50 50 93 93 8 08 51 51 94 94 9 09 52 52 95 95 10 10 53 53 96 96 11 11 54 54 97 97 12 12 55 55 98 98 13 13 56 56 99 99 14 14 57 57 100 00 15 15 58 58 101 16 16 59 59 102 17 17 60 60 103 18 18 61 61 104 19 19 62 62 105 20 20 63 63 106 21 21 64 64 107 22 22 65 65 108 23 23 66 66 109 24 24 67 67 110 25 25 68 68 111 26 26 69 69 112 27 27 70 70 113 28 28 71 71 114 29 29 72 72 115 30 30 73 73 116 81 31 74 74 117 32 32 75 75 118 33 33 76 76 119 34 34 77 77 120 35 35 78 78 121 36 36 79 79 122 37 37 80 80 123 38 38 81 81 124 39 39 82 82 125 40 40 83 83 126 s 41 41 84 84 127 42 42 85 85 128 43 43 86 86 138 01X Owner s Manual E Input Patch Parameters Parameter Lists Each display may differ depending on the channel name Studio Manager settings 2 Disabled when Wordclock is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz E 2 INPUT PATCH IN1 8 EFFECT PATCH Display Description Input Display Description z NONE NONE AUX3 AUX3 for EFFECT1 AD1 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 1 AUX4 AUXA for EFFECT2 AD2 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 2 CH1 InsertOut CH1 AD3 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 3 CH2 InsertOut CH2 z AD4 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 4 CH3 InsertOut CH3 amp ADS MIC LINE INPUT AD
46. AUX4 3 AD3 4 AD4 5 ADS CHANNEL NAME 6 AD6 CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG 7 AD7 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 8 ADB CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH4 STEREO INPUT CHANNEL CHS CHS CHS CHS STI L amp R FX1 L amp R CH6 CH6 CH6 CH6 STI2 L amp R FX2 L amp R CH7 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH8 ST IN1 STI STI STEREO IN1 ST IN2 STI2 STI2 STEREO IN2 01X Owners Manual 139 uoi2ag soiseg BuisQ a1ojag 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 140 Parameter Lists E Output Patch Parameters Each display may differ depending on the channel name Studio Manager settings Disabled when Wordclock is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz mLAN OUT Output D OUT ST AUX OUT Output Display Description Display Description NONE ST BUS Stereo Bus 1 2 mLAN Out 1 2 RECBUS REC Bus 3 4 mLAN Out 3 4 AUX1 2 AUX Bus 1 2 5 6 mLAN Out 5 6 AUX3 4 AUX Bus 3 4 7 8 mLAN Out 7 8 9 10 mLAN Out 9 10 11 12 mLAN Out 11 12 13 14 mLAN Out 13 14 15 16 mLAN Out 15 16 17 18 mLAN Out 17 18 19 20 mLAN Out 19 20 21 22 mLAN Out 21 22 23 24 mLAN Out 23 24 Bi Initial Output Patch Settings Each display may differ depending on the channel name Studio Manager settings Disabled when Wordclock is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz DIGITAL STEREO OUT STEREO AUX OUT CHANNEL NAME D OUT ST BUS CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG ST AUX OUT ST BUS AUX1 AU
47. Connector refer to the separate Installation Guide the wordclock is set to 88 2kHz or 96kHz cs Computer e Multi Part Editor nm c for MOTIF RACK DAW Digital Audio Workstation 2 Acrobat Reader Fee or POF Manual S File exchange Software Effect 01X Channel Module Commercially Enne avaliable Program Vocal Rack Synthesizer Auto Connector Change Final Master FA o i e Driver Setup 5 StudioManager T e cc goer mLAN Driver MIDI amp Audio mLAN mLAN MIDIINIOUT Audio IN OUT LM 9 B B O S XS 5 5 IEEE 1394 Connectors a E O O Fire Wire i Link 2 o g g z2 I E H z rd m pon P L mLAN Connectors 1 2 mLAN mLAN MIDI IN OUT Audio IN OUT L m 4 mLAN Audio Audio conversion 3 mLAN IN 1 16 01X mLAN MIDI MIDI conversion i Remote Control of Remote Control Multi Part Editor of DAW Port 1 or Program Change Scene Selection Port 5 mLAN STEREO IN 17 18 9 10 Transfer with Studio Manager Port 4 AUX 3 4 AUX 1 2 Direct OUT 1 24 RECBUS Remote Control Sue Ur MIC LINE DIGITAL DIGITAL STEREO MONITOR PHONES INPUT STEREO STEREO AUXOUT OUT 1 8 ADIN N OUT MOTIF RACK 01X Owners Manual 25 Overview of the 01X When using the included SQ01 V2 Buis 910199 Computer SS D n o N D
48. Effect 1 and 8 for Effect 2 when MASTER layer in the MIXER LAYER is seleced in Internal mode Differences from input channels Stereo No dynamics processor No direct output STEREO STEREO BUS L STEREO STEREO BUS R RECBUS BUS L RECBUS BUS R AUX 1 AUX 3 FX1 AUX 4 FX2 AUX 2 ST IN 1 2 e Z LA 5 JATT d 4BAND EQ 4 04 0 N N Qa i T TER 5 Pod E 44atr 4BAND EQ LL AEN 7 L x gt E T i Stereo in X 2 l 96kHz 88 2kHz X 1 ME on AUX l N f t i T odo N CAUTION When using an internal effect via the Aux Send do NOT turn up the send level to the corresponding AUX bus for the channel to which the effect return signal is routed Doing so will result in loud feedback and may damage your equipment For example when the 01X is in the default condition AUX 3 is routed to the input of internal effect 1 and the L R signals of the ST IN chan nel 1 are routed to the output If you turn up the send level of ST IN channel 1 to AUX 3 a feedback loop is created Since stereo input channels 1 2 are stereo adjacent odd numbered even numbered signals will be assigned to them when MIC LINE inputs are selected as the input signals Also if DIGITAL STEREO IN is selected both L and R signals will be assigned Ove
49. FX2 are selected for the stereo input channel 1 2 page 89 this can be used as a conventional effect send return If you select a particular channel such as the input channels REC bus stereo out it can be used as an insertion effect f effects are inserted in channels you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels The number of inputs and outputs available for each effect varies depend ing on the type of effect programs recalled A caution e When using an internal effect via the Aux Send do NOT turn up the send level to the corresponding AUX bus for the channel to which the effect return signal is routed Doing so will result in loud feedback and may damage your equipment For example when the 01X is in the default condition AUX 3 is routed to the input of internal effect 1 and the L R signals of the ST IN channel 1 are routed to the output If you turn up the send level of ST IN channel 1 to AUX 3 a feedback loop is created No 4 BYPASS Determines whether or not effects can be bypassed No 5 MIX When set to 0 only the dry signal is heard When set to 100 only the wet signal is heard To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux Sends with the original dry sound set the effect s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100 only the effects sound will be output No 6 TYPE Indicates the currently selected effect type You cannot chan
50. Female Vo 2 A variation on preset 27 and congas 29 Chorus amp Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses 9 E Bass 1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies 30 Total EQ 1 Use on a stereo mix during mixdown Sounds even better when used with a compressor 10 E Bass 2 Unlike preset 9 this preset emphasizes the low 7 range of an electric bass 31 Total EQ 2 A variation on preset 30 11 Syn Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range 32 Total EQ 3 A variation on preset 30 Can also be used with ole paired Input or Output Channels 12 Syn Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass A variation on preset 1 with low and mid range 13 Piano 1 Makes pianos sound brighter 99 Bass Bruns reduced 14 Piano 2 Used in conjunction with a compressor this preset 34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3 creating a thicker sound emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos 7 A variation on preset 5 emphasizing the mid and 15 E G Clean Use for line level recording of an electric or semi ME Iams high ranges sh acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound 36 Piano 3 A variation on preset 13 16 E G Crunch 1 dim the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar rupem e Puma 37 Piano Low ps asizes the low range of pianos recorded in ste 17 E G Crunch2 A variation on preset 16 38 Piano High Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in 18 E G Dist
51. IN 5 CH4 InsertOut CH4 2 AD6 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 6 CH5 InsertOut CH5 Tm AD7 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 7 CH6 InsertOut CH6 A AD8 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 8 CH7 InsertOut CH7 DIN L DIGITAL STEREO IN L CH8 InsertOut CH8 DIN R DIGITAL STEREO IN R mL1 CH9 InsertOut mL1 CH9 mL2 CH10 InsertOut mL2 CH10 g mL3 CH11 InsertOut mL3 CH11 s INPUT PATCH STI1 2 mL4 CH12 InsertOut mL4 CH12 R Display Description Input mL5 CH13 InsertOut mL5 CH13 NONE NONE mL6 CH14 InsertOut mL6 CH14 E AD1 2 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 1 2 mL7 GH15 InsertOut mLE7 CH15 AD3 4 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 3 4 mL8 CH16 InsertQut mL8 CH16 AD5 6 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 5 6 iL CT sour mea AD7 8 MIC LINE INPUT AD IN 7 8 UTE ORe TESTS TES DIN DIGITAL STEREO IN L amp R mL11 CH19 InsertOut mL11 CH19 FX1 EFFECT for STI1 mL12 CH20 InsertOut mL12 CH20 o FX2 EFFECT for STI2 mL13 CH21 InsertOut mL13 CH21 z mL14 CH22 InsertOut mL14 CH22 cc mL15 CH23 InsertOut mL15 CH23 mL16 CH24 InsertOut mL16 CH24 BUS InsertOut REC BUS L amp R STEREO InsertOut STEREO BUS L amp R Appendix Bi Initial Input Patch Settings Each display may differ depending on the channel name Studio Manager settings Disabled when Wordclock is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz INPUT CHANNEL EFFECT PATCH 1 AD1 FX1 EFFECT1 AUX3 2 AD2 FX2 EFFECT2
52. INPUTS 1 8 are assigned to input J channels 1 8 respectively The same input signal can be simultaneously routed to several different c input channels The Input Patch settings made here can be stored to the Input Patch D Library page 89 No INPUT PATCH gt MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 1 NONE AD1 8 AD1 IN1 27 T DIN L DIN R IN1 8 61 2 MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 2 S AD2 IN2 MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 3 5 ADS IN3 No MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 4 AD4 IN4 MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 5 ADS UNS MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 6 AD6 IN6 MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 7 D AD7 IN7 No MIC LINE INPUT jack Input Channel 8 AD8 IN8 88 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name settings Explanation Prompt Related pages Block diagram 3 INPUT PATCH ST1 2 Input Channel Stereo 1 2 Determines the input signal routing for Stereo Input channels STI1 2 The NONE AD1 2 AD7 8 Settings FX1 and FX2 correspond to the outputs of internal effects The D D IN EX1 STH i settings AD1 2 AD7 8 correspond to MIC LINE INPUTS 1 8 while No DIN corresponds to the DIGITAL STEREO IN signals Turning the knob immediately changes the routing To disable input f
53. Input Patch Scene Library number of currently used Output Patch Scene ay e If changes made to the Input Patch or Output Patch settings are not stored to the Patch Library Patch settings may not be appropriate when calling up the stored Scene This applies also when changing the Input Patch Output Patch data assigned to the Scene after the Scene has been stored 01X Owner s Manual 85 Function Tree Function List Function name Related Block settings pages diagram Explanation Prompt This deletes the selected Scene 7 CLEAR NOTE J Yes e You can turn write protect on for specific important Scenes that you wish to keep from inadvertently overwriting or deleting See Protect below 65 usn 910190 This turns write protect on for Scenes that you wish to keep from inadvert ently overwriting or deleting The protected Scenes are indicated by asterisks in the display and cannot be selected for the Store destination or Clear source Yes 8 PROTECT 2 PATCH LIBRARY ASSIGN uoi2ag saiseg IN PATCH This determines the Library numbers of the specific Input Patch and Output Input Patch Patch settings you wish to recall with the Scene Select the desired number by 00 32 turning the appropriate channel knob 6 or 8 The display indication 88 H NN No OUT PATCH flashes To revert to the original value without changing it hold down 90
54. LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 SY35 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefiihrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslindern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha mas cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve Genevastraat 10 1140 Brussels Belgium Tel 02 726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S A The Music House 147 Skiathou Street 112 55 Athens Greece Tel 01 228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herle
55. OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSHF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency o LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 5 HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency 2 HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain ce AUTO PAN Two input two output autopanner gt lt Parameter Range Description E FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed 2i DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR N Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSHF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 4 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSHF 50
56. ON button to the REC RDY function ights Indicates the automation condition of the channel in the LCD AUTO R W while being pressed s READ Automation TOUCH ights 38 s READ Automation LATCH AUTO R W SEL Switches the automation Read function on off and changes automation mode to Touch ights 36 GROUP while being pressed Indicates the Group to which the fader is assigned and the currently lit eleases the Group assignment GROUP and th ly lit SEL Rel he Group assig SHIFT GROUP Assigns the selected channels to a Group AUDIO INSTRUMENT MIDI BUS AUXJ OTHER Displays the Mixer window BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication every eight channels SHIFT BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication channel by channel urns Loop on or off LOOP T Loop ff F1 F8 No function SHIFT F1 Displays the Track Overview SHIFT F2 Displays the Mixer window SHIFT F3 Displays the Event List window for the selected channel 23 oses the current window SHIFT F4 Cl h indi SHIFT F5 Displays the MIDI Edit window 23 24 SHIFT F6 Displays the Sequencer Editor window isplays the Soundbites window SHIFT F7 Displays the Soundbi ind SHIFT F8 No function xecutes the Undo operation UNDO E he Undo operati xecutes the Redo operation SHIFT UNDO E he Redo operati SAVE When the lamp lights press this so tha
57. OTHER Makes the Global View mode active and displays the AUDIO INPUT object with the ights 9 Multi Channel view Pressing this again restores the normal track display 9 BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication every eight channels SHIFT BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication channel by channel FLIP Exchanges the functions between the Channel Knobs and the Faders lights SHIFT FLIP Assigns the function of the Channel Knob to the Fader flashes EDIT Turns Nudge on or off lights goes out SHIFT EDIT Enters the Nudge Option mode LOOP Turns Loop on or off lights goes out SHIFT LOOP Enters the Cycle Option mode F1 F7 Calls up Screen Sets 1 7 rings the Track View window to the front of the computer screen SHIFT F1 Brings the Track Vi ind he fi f th p isplays the Mixer window SHIFT F2 Displays the Mi ind SHIFT F3 Displays the List window oses the current window SHIFT F4 Cl hi ind SHIFT F5 Displays the Piano Roll window SHIFT F6 Displays the Score window SHIFT F7 Displays the Audio window SHIFT F8 Shows the Transport Bar UNDO Executes the Undo operation SHIFT UNDO Executes the Redo operation 106 01X Owner s Manual Remote Function List Notes Button Function LED page 114 c
58. Patchbay Online Manual Have you changed the device Even if the model is the same if the actual device is different it is necessary to re enable con nection by using mLAN Auto Connector or Graphic Patchbay en Connecting the Computer and mLAN devices via mLAN Installation Guide mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual s there a loop connection Check the cabling and make sure none of the devices are connected in a loop Example of loop connection Computer Computer ux 01X IEEE 1394 equipped device There may be a limit on the IEEE 1394 interface of your com puter as to the number of ports that can be used simultaneously Check how many ports can be used simultaneously Turn off all devices on the mLAN network except the com puter and re connect each device one by one until the device causing the problem is found For Windows When removing the mLAN bus from the Safely Remove Hardware setting of the task bar Restart the computer when using mLAN again With Macintosh notebook computers such as the iBook and PowerBook always first connect the 01 X and mLAN cable then turn on the power of the 01X before starting up the com puter Make sure that you set up the wordclock correctly Also make sure that one node is assigned as master and the other nodes are assigned as slaves Am mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual R The mLAN Driver MIDI
59. SHELF G 4 5dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB G 20dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 4 0 dB 08 Percussion 20 A G Stroke 1 F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 80 kHz 17 0 kHz F 106 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90kHz 5 30 kHz Q 4 5 0 56 Q 0 9 4 5 3 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 5 dB 44 5 dB 42 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 09 E Bass 1 21 A G Stroke 2 F 355Hz 112 Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz Q 5 45 Q 9 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 3 0 dB 0 0 dB 42 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 10 E Bass 2 22 A G Arpeg 1 F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2 24 kHz 4 00 kHz F 224 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 1 5 6 3 Q 4 5 4 5 0 12 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 48 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB G 0 0dB 5 5 dB 0 0 dB 44 0 dB 11 Syn Bass 1 23 A G Arpeg 2 F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4 00kHz 12 5 kHz F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz Q 0 1 8 4 5 Q 7 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 12 Syn Bass 2 24 Brass Sec F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1 12 kHz 12 5 kHz F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 1 6 8 2 2 2 8 2 0 7 7 Parameter Lists
60. Section sss 30 Output patch Basics Section reete etes 30 OUTPUT PATCH DIGI ST AUX OUT PORT 91 OUTPUT PATCH DIRECT OUT POSITION 91 OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL 90 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY 5 ete rri ee ns 91 Output Patching aa etre deret nte E eR E ERU 61 Overview of the OLX Basics Section s sssstazsa zet tenda r avia 25 P PAGE T oe Aisne a Genie ha San ace cea 96 PAGE SHIFT button 17 PAIR tnessesme 102 Pairing channels 154 PAN iisnesnems 99 PAN button s 19 P rining 5 asas 6 329 PARAM DISP TIME 495 Parameter Display Time nne enl 95 Parameter Lists 52 uon nc n e ERR 115 Parameters 1 9 6 sche hse un pner e AERE 100 PATCH 4a Reni eR 88 PATCH LIBRARY ASSIGN eere 86 PEAK HOLD tn pii be RAE 46 PHANTOM 448V switch sees 22 PHASE cotone onda eases Aes UR 99 Arce 99 PHONES Jack ertet irent reri eate he e e RENE e ee nea einn 21 Pitch Fix incor et o aae e ORO OU 9 Play B DUTON 2 ie oin tent tentent rette tirare bred 20 Play Dac 66 POST Aux Send irre eerte SIRE UR 100 POST FADER 91 Power Supply 124 Power on Procedure 24 PRE Aux Seld ss s5cissaccalesasseesbentesaiesaedcesees ses eere E X GENER 100 PREEO o oooetenewnenes Memes 91 PRE FADER PREFER Preference Preference 2e 595 Preset Dynamics LIbrary 14 2 d
61. Selected Channel only E 96 0qB 12 0dB Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB No o zt amp B EQ LIBRARY Selected Channel only e This can be called up by pressing the same EQ button twice in a row For example EQ LOW EQ LOW 5 S See EQ High see below No EQ HIGH INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL EQ HIGH EQ HIGH GAIN EQH G PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V JJ D D Adjusts the gain level When Q is set to LPF this turns the filter on or off ED 18 0dB 18 0dB Pressing the EQ LOW and EQ HIGH buttons simultaneously resets all No D E band parameters gain frequency and Q for the selected channel D EQ HIGH FREQUENCY EQH F Mc 21 2Hz 20 0kHz Adjusts the frequency No z EQ HIGH Q EQH Q K e LPF 10 0 0 10 Determines the bandwidth of the EQ processing When Q is set to LPF the No H SHELF gain control turns the filter on or off EQ ON OFF Turns the EQ on or off The HIGH band EQ functions as a low pass filter 1j 18 ON OFF when the Q parameter is set to LPF It functions as a shelving type EQ when No o 1 the Q parameter is set to H BSHELF The L and R settings of the ST IN chan nel s EQ are linked together ATT Attenuate Selected Channel only 96 0dB 12 0dB Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB No o 98 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List
62. Store destination will be lost when executing the Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 7 CLEAR This deletes the selected Effect Library Yes CHANNEL LIBRARY SHIFT SELECTED CHANNEL Determines the Library number Preset Channel numbers are indicated by asterisks in the display and cannot be changed The following presets are available 00 128 e 00 Reset O0dB This preset memory resets all parameters of the cur DEORE iim No 36 Library number rently selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to OOdB 01 Reset OdB This preset memory resets all parameters of the cur rently selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to OdB i e nominal Determines the title name of the Effect Library The category IN BUS 11 141 Title Edit AUX ST is shown following the name for all Library Scenes excepting pre No 41 sets For calling up the selected Library The Libraries that can be recalled from the channel Library are limited to ones whose category is the same as the cur 6 RECALL rently selected channel For example you can recall Input Channel settings to Yes 54 Input Channels but not to Aux Out 1 through 4 with the exception that mem ories 0 and 1 can be recalled to any channels Channel settings are stored to internal memory in the Channel Library Up to 127 settings can be stor
63. Use the SEL buttons and the BANK lt gt Left Right buttons if necessary Note that the display windows in Cubase SX change as well letting you directly select the Channel Settings window for any track Only audio channels can be controlled from the 01X MIDI chan nels and MIDI effects can be called up but effect control is not implemented However keep in mind that you CAN control EQ and effects of the plug in instruments see below wr Controlling effects for plug in instruments e Even though the plug in instruments plug in synthesizers drum machines samplers etc are technically MIDI instruments their audio signals are fair game for processing with the EQ and effects To control these from the 01X use the BANK lt gt Left Right buttons if necessary and the SEL buttons to select the appropriate plug in audio channel Make sure NOT to select the normal MIDI track channel here 2 Call up the Send parameters by pressing the SEND button SEND DN gs 3 From Page 1 use the knobs to adjust the effect send level for each effect 1 8 4 If necessary turn the desired effect on or off Call up Page 2 of the Send parameters with the DIS PLAY A v Up Down buttons then use the corre sponding knob to turn the effect 1 8 for the channel on or off Fanz FXO Select other pages in the Send parameters with the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons and make the appr
64. aai E a E e ERRARE 6 ACTIVE lamp rennen 2 22 Application examples Basics Section 34 Application Index sss 10 ASIO Driver Setup 69 ASIO mLAN 68 Attack Compander 5 cernerent tee thong 123 Attack Compressor cise teer contr eee 122 Attack Expander oro epi ttr i e cent 123 Attack Gate and Ducking sese 124 Attenuator ATT 01X Terminology 14 JNUdIOetUp zer re RR rhe 68 AUTO EDIT Automation Edit button p i AUTO R W Automation Read Write button i7 Automation 01X Terminology Pore Automation Getting Started ed T AUX 01X Terminology 14 AUX 1 4PREPOST eret terae etr rh ert rient 100 AUX buses 1 through 4 01 X Terminology 14 AUX Send Level 1 4 5 reiten 100 AC T eee PP a denote ee Ra id toten 100 B BACKUP en uer er ERRORS GER BU ERE S K EAEE 86 BALANCE cite Ee PREIS SEES EE EIEEE EREE 99 Bank 01X Terminology rtt eie 15 BANK lt gt Left Right buttons sss 19 Basic Operations Basics Section sss 37 Buses 0IX Terminology rtt 14 BYPASS aaaeeeaa a m En e ce n HERI 102 C CDROM erunt evo ed t Gut NE Im RTI 6 Channel 01X Terminology eee 14 Channel Tadets c c err nti opere elastase 17 Channel KODS nen teo i EUER 17 CHANNEL LIBRARY 5 Hen 103 Channel Pai
65. are transferred the wordclock page 23 of the devices must match If this wordclock is not generated accurately a type of noise called jitter will occur Less variation in the wordclock rate compared to a perfectly accurate square wave i e a more stable clock will mean less jitter and better audio quality Bi Library This is a memory location for storing individual settings such as those of Scene EQ or Dynamics The 01X has separate Libraries for Scene EQ Dynamics effects chan nels input patch and output patch Each Library is stored saved to internal memory The 01X also includes many convenient presets in the Libraries for instant use in differ ent recording and mixing applications iil Nominal level The nominal level referred to on a mixer or recorder indicates the standard level setting for that device When all parameters are set to the nominal level the audio qual ity will be the closest to the specifications given in the cat alog B Scenes A Scene is a program containing mixing settings and internal effect parameter settings for all channels and is stored to internal memory in the Scene Library Remote Control Terms E Automation A function by which adjustments of mixer parameters via the knobs and faders are recorded in real time and are exactly reproduced during playback The 01X works in tandem with DAW digital audio work station software such as SQ01 Cubase SX SL etc
66. be memorized by the Backup function If not memorized they will be lost when turning off the power Make sure to 8 YES save or back up important data Yes N CAUTION e Any and all previous backup data will be lost when executing Backup Make sure to save and archive important data to computer using the Stu dio Manager program page 9 86 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name x Related Block R Explanation Prompt c settings pages diagram E D MENU SELECT UTILITY or UTILITY in Utility mode gt o 1 REMOTE Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Remote Control menu see below No ea 2 PATCH Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Patch menu page 88 No 3 W CLK Wordclock Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Wordclock menu page 92 No 4 DIO Digital In Out Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Digital In Out menu page 93 No o 5 OSC Oscillator Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Oscillator menu page 93 No e e 6 MIDI Pressing this jumps to the first page of the MIDI menu page 94 No S GD 7 PREFER Preference Pressing this jumps to the first page of the Preference menu page 95 No 8 MON Monitor Pr
67. button SOLO button or REC RDY but ton QD Q Channel faders Depending on the settings of the MIXER LAYER section page 40 these motorized faders adjust either the input level of each channel or the output level of the AUX REC buses By setting the Fader Touch Timeout parameter page 88 to an appropriate value a touch out function for the faders can be emulated See also AUTO EDIT but ton Stereo fader This motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo Out By setting the Timeout parameter page 88 to an appropriate value a touch out function for the faders can be emulated See also BI AUTO EDIT button NAME VALUE button Switches the display type between a channel parameter value multi function display or one that shows only the parameter values By holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the NAME VALUE button you can also enable and change the meter display page 46 Controls and Connectors MONITOR PHONES knob Adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack NOTE L You can monitor the output directly monitor cascade through the connected speaker system headphones according to the MONITOR A B setting if the stereo master output of the DAW is set to the last two available channels the last two numbered channels specified with mLAN Auto Connector refer to the sepa rate Installation Guide O DISPLA
68. can be turned S on off as desired See Store Confirmation on page 95 6 STORE CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the Store destination will be lost when executing the 55 Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com D puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 cs 7 CLEAR This deletes the selected Output Patch Yes D 2 W CLK Wordclock UTILITY Channel knob 3 o 1 mLAN AUTO W CLK mLAN Auto Wordclock PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A v When ENABLE is selected the 01X automatically switches its wordclock 7p status to master or slave depending on the setting of the connected computer 1 ENABLE The current status is shown at the top right of the display The indication Yes amp kHz is shown when the system is unlocked no signal present When e the 01X is set to master either automatically or manually use the next page W CLK SELECT to specify the wordclock setting When the 01X is set 23 Di to slave the wordclock is set automatically to mLAN 2 DISABLE e When mLAN is used make sure to set this to ENABLE Select the Yes wordclock sample rate with the Auto Connector application Refer to the separate Installation Guide JJ 2 W CLK SELECT Wordclock Select s N CAUTION pe e Changing the wordclock settings on any of the devices in your digital audio system may produce noise in some of the devices For this rea son make sure to turn down t
69. e The direct out setting for a specific channel is cancelled if the corre sponding output channel is assigned to stereo bus rec bus or AUX buses page 90 Monitor output headphone output For monitoring purposes the 01X provides MONITOR OUT jacks and a PHONES jack The MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack always output the same signal and is linked to the level adjustment You can monitor the output directly monitor cascade through the connected speaker system headphones according to the MONITOR A B setting if the stereo master output of the DAW is set to the last two available channels the last two numbered channels specified with mLAN Auto Connector refer to the separate Installation Guide Refer to Monitor on gi page 96 PHONES mLAN STEREO IN r MONITOR IN T MLAN STEREO IN p A MONITOR IN MONITOR CASCADE MONITOR OUT STEREO L DA g Bas f Ld i0dBV STEREO R DA g R MONITOR Min Max P AB MONITOR Mix Balance PHONES Knob Overview of the 01X Internal effects 1 2 The two built in effect units deliver a wide variety of effects including spatial type effects such as reverb and delay modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger and guitar type effects such as distortion and amp simula tion These effects can be used via Aux send the level cor responds to the master level of the stereo input channels or inserted into a desired channel
70. eine 20 Markets iin eso roma e E TWERHE MR cleo sav AE ENEAS S CINE WERE Rn 74 Memory Library Structure Basics Section 36 MENU SELECT tnn perierit ise a ARD 87 Meter EE 46 MIC EINE INPU iine hah diate Rc IO EN RS 21 MIC LINE INPUT TRS phone jacks 3 through 8 BAL 21 MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 2 eene 21 MIC LINE INPUT j ck 8 HZ rrenetan anrs 21 MIDE em 94 95 MIDI A IN OUT terminals MIDI B IN OUT terminals 22 MIDI arid audio Setup entente noire t itin 67 MUIDECEHANNBED 515 rerit ir dnte 94 MIDI Data Poriridl tirer eorr eerte perrito ent 141 MIDI Implementation Chart rector aei 142 MIDI Receive channel uio tree ett ferire dn 94 MIDI set p irre tre e tr aer eene testes ee eir ssis 67 MIDI Transmit channel 5n ah 94 MIX SOLO 12 cnet Rey perry rents cere trier ore cues aec d 96 Mixer control using the faders and knobs 75 MIXER EA YER b ttOfs 22 nione RHOD fn 19 Mixing D tOrtal 4 35 2 3 nio HERE GOL edd 46 mLAN IEEE 1394 connectors 1 2 asses essen ennenen 22 mLAN AUTO W CLK mLAN Auto Wordclock 92 MILAN Auto Sas Te Te rite tir tib iirin 92 mLAN MIDI INFORMATION asses 95 MLAN OUT CHANING 5 2 3 rete e rettet 90 Mode selection and display indications Basics Section 38 Modes Basics Section eii fett eer eti ehe 37 MON MOILOE x deae otio rte
71. feedback STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSHF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6ms 46 0s fs 44 1kHz 5ms 42 3s REV CHORUS fs 48kHz 3ms 23 0s fs 88 2kHz 3ms 21 1s fs 96kHz One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV CHO 0 100 Reverb and chorus balance 0 all reverb 100 all chorus FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists REV CHORUS One input two o
72. having to leave the Channel Settings window You can also select plug in instrument channels for EQ process ing See the Hint Controlling effects for plug in instruments on page 81 Recording Playback Remote Control 4 Press one of the EQ buttons to call up EQ control Pressing any one of the EQ buttons will call up the same menu EQ LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH by Freuz aing Freed Gaini Full Kit Bain 5 Use the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons to change display pages Page 1 contains the Frequency and Gain knobs for bands 1 4 and Page 2 contains the Enable on off and Q bandwidth controls Fresi Gaini Fresz Gainz Freed Gaini Eu lt Full Kit G2 Enabl3 U3 Enabl4 abili Bi Enablz oz Full Kit Page 6 Adjust the parameters Use the knobs to change the settings or turn FLIP on and use the faders Notice the EQ response curve in the window and watch how it mirrors the changes you make If the curve does not change make sure you ve enabled the EQ band in display Page 2 or in Cubase SX e Any changes you make from your computer keyboard or mouse will automatically be reflected in the 01X as well in other words the values will change and if FLIP is on the faders will move 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section 923 Nn D CS oS Reference Appendix 79 Recording Playback Remote Control usn 910190 u
73. high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 to 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 to 0 0 dB OFF Specifies the maximum output level EXP THRE 54 0 to 24 0 dB Expander threshold EXP RAT 1 1 to 90 1 Expander ratio EXP REL i Expander release time Appendix EXP BYP OFF ON Expander bypass LIM THRE 12 0 to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold LIM ATK 0 120 ms Limiter attack LIM REL s Limiter release time LIM BYP OFF ON Limiter bypass LIM KNEE 0 5 Limiter knee SOLO LOW OFF ON If this is on only the low frequency band will be output SOLO MID OFF ON If this is on only the mid frequency band will be output SOLO HIGH OFF ON If this is on only the high frequency band will be output 1 6ms 46 0s fs 44 1kHz 5ms 42 3s fs 48kHz 3ms 23 0s fs 88 2kHz 3ms 21 1s fs 96kHz 01X Owner s Manual 137 uoi2ag soiseg usn 910199 92u919J9H pauejs fura xipuaddy Parameter Lists E Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial Scene User Program Initial Scene User Program Initial Scene User Change No No Scene No Change No No Scene No Change No No Scene No 1 01 44 44 87 87 2 02 45 45 88 88 3 03 46 46 89 89 4 04 47 47 90 90 5 05 48 48 91 91
74. hore ree te er PE etel 96 d Lee seisoene p EUER Eee Ehe bec EDI Dci EMT de epp aS 96 MONITOR Monitor Mix Balance see 96 MONITOR A B DUON 5 nt E E HY erre Aa 18 Monitor Mix Balance nna ed anie TERT NE 96 MONITOR OUT Jacks rre err e periere n 21 Monitor output headphone output Basics Section 3l MONITOR PHONES knob sse Td 5 2 coed cai iiesi a Gbasconsvectessess 17 Moving faders 01 X Terminology eee 15 Multi Channel e Rc e erret eeu rio 19 Multi Part Editor 2 ceci oes chases cca etie erae edet 9 95 MUTE GROUP ac de neci eren ree E D aids 101 Mute Groups P trn 64 llirzis lo ge 76 N NAME V ALUE Dutton 5 5 terret re 17 Nominal level QIX Terminology ees 14 NUENDO Remote Function List sse 108 0 ON DUOS 35 5 atro rt rrt E OH OO PEOR TEENS 17 ON OFF channel 2 rrt rati ten e ren 99 OS Oscillator ii ri rere eere ce Ferre aeo eth Ee Fuer eee cert ERR 93 OSC ASSIGN Oscillator Assign eee 93 OSCILLATOR eterne ani PERRO OE 93 OsctllatoE i icosdo rei eoe ti UE Ree 93 Oscillator Basics Section ssssssssseeseeeeereees 29 Oscillator ASSIEIE ettet HERRERA med 93 Out Gain Comnpatider sssini been n 123 Out Gain Compressor erneuert eterne si censeret ehe ene dae hee a 122 Qut Gam EX pander eros eene certaine rbita n 123 Output channel Basics
75. indicates that distortion is occurring because the input gain is too high This can be used to check for clipping of the input signal even though there is no clipping indicator If this input is too high turn the INPUT METER POINT OUTPUT METER POINT PEAK HOLD gain knob slightly to the left or adjust the output volume of the input source PRE ER FRE FHDER OH 46 01X Owner s Manual Mixing Tutorial With Studio Manager CD Follow the basic procedure above or at least the first two steps setting the controls to minimum and con necting the source s 2 Make sure that the mLAN connection with your com puter is active For instructions on installing the mLAN driver and connecting the 01X to your computer via mLAN refer to page 22 and the separate Installation Guide 8 Start Studio Manager StudioManaeer for DIX Eje Windows Simchronization Hele Lo CE KR ee eee To use Studio Manager with the 01X the mLAN port must be set to 4 See page 95 4 Studio Manager automatically detects the connected 01X and after a short pause prompts you to select the type of link synchronization for your computer and the 01X Click on Console PC here 5 Set the levels on the 01X Follow the same procedure as you did in step 4 in the previous instructions You can use the software controls to adjust the level Notice that the faders on the 01 X move when you move the software faders
76. input two output reverb and flanger effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and flanged reverb balance 0 all flanged reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 133 Parameter Lists REV SYMPHO E One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel Ss Parameter Range Description c REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time 2 INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins e HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency E LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff freque
77. is shown Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data If you feel any resistance when moving one of the faders you should stop moving it Never force a fader if it shows signs of resistance doing so may damage the device XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use Even when the power switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level When you are not using the instrument for a long time make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet 3 7 2 2 01X Owner s Manual Introduction Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha 01X Digital Mixing Studio The 01X is a full featured music production tool that effectively gives you three sophisti cated comprehensive devices in one easy to use package convenient remote control over your computer based DAW digital audio workstation via mLAN connection FireWire i Link IEEE 1394 digital audio mixing with 24 bit 96kHz sound quality and full audio MIDI interfacing with your computer environment via the mLAN connection With its wealth of built in effects and advanced functions not
78. level adjustment Dynam ics and four band EQ Using the Studio Manager soft ware on your computer gives you onscreen display and control of level Dynamics and the four band EQ This application also takes advantage of the flexible rout ing options letting you set up a separate stereo bus and recording bus Moreover the individual vocals and instru ments are recorded directly to computer as 24 bit digital audio data at up to 96kHz sampling rate if desired When the 01X is set to 88 2kHz 96kHz operation mLAN trans mission from the computer is limited to eight channels and only one internal effect block can be used Monitor mixer features Another huge benefit of this setup is that the mixer inputs recorded to the computer can be monitored directly from the 01 X complete with all Dynamics EQ and effect pro cessing You can also monitor the audio tracks on the com puter with 01X effect processing as well via the mLAN input channels 2 Digital mixer function Here the 01X functions simultaneously as a front end audio interface for a computer system as well as a fully digital mixer for your sequencer audio tracks Computer Audio Mixer 01X Monitor Out With the mLAN connection this system allows you to route up to sixteen independent audio channels plus the two channel stereo master from the computer to the input channels of the 01X and have the eight rear panel inputs available for yo
79. lt Receiving gt Data is received when PROGRAM CHANGE RX is on and the receive channel settings match However when OMNI is set to on reception is enabled regardless of the channel settings Upon reception Library Scenes are recalled according to the settings of the Program Change Assign Table lt Transmitting gt When PROGRAM CHANGE TX is on recalling a Library Scene transmits data via the set transmit channel accord ing to the settings of the Program Change Assign Table STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Onnnnnnn nn Program change Program number 0 127 4 2 Active Sensing FE lt Receiving gt If no Active Sensing messages are received within 400 ms MIDI communications are initialized such as clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 4 3 System Reset FF lt Receiving gt Upon reception this initializes MIDI communications such as clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111111 FF System reset Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 141 uoioag saiseg Huis 910199 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 142 MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING STUDIO Date ue 2003 Model 01X MIDI Implementation Chart Version Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function Basic Default Memorized Channel Memorized Default OMNI off OMNI on Memorized Messages x Altered okckckckckckckockck kok A x True voice KKKKKK
80. o should remain active Yes while Ports 1 and 4 8 should be inactive No Click OK to finish 68 01X Owner s Manual 5 If desired click the Control Panel button and adjust the latency Preferred Buffer Size For details on setting the latency refer to the separate Installation Guide 6 Click OK to finish Recording Playback Remote Control ASIO Driver Setup CD From the Devices menu select VST Inputs Cubase SX File Edit Project Audio MIDI Scores Pool Transport A SB Live MIDI Synth B SB Live MIDI Synth MIDI Device Manager Mackie Control Mixer Mixer 2 Plug in Information VST Instruments YST Master Effects VST Master Setup VST Outputs VST Performance VST Send Effects Video Show Panel Device Setup 2 Activate all the inputs you intend to use Click on the power button to activate a desired input Up to 24 inputs refer to the mLAN Auto Connector explanation of the separate Installation Guide can be activated simultaneously NOTE e The channel numbers that are actually in effect mirror the set tings of mLAN Auto Connector see the separate Installation Guide YST Inputs NOTE When the 01X is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz operation mLAN output from 01X to the computer is limited to 16 channels In this case the maximum number of input channels that can be acti vated is 16 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Se
81. on the 01X to hear the intended final sound but record dry to computer The 01X Channel Module plug in can be used afterwards to actually process the recorded sound as you wish More over you can copy settings from Studio Manager to the 01X Channel Module and adjust tweak the mix using the Channel Module plug in Settings you ve made or changed in the Channel Module can also be transferred back to Studio Manager 01X Owners Manual 35 Before Using e 99 N o 4 pz S Reference Getting Started Appendix Memory Library Structure Memory Library Structure The 01X features several libraries internal memory that enable you to store Scene Input Patch Output Patch and other data You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values Fur thermore the Backup function lets you save your data including the Utility settings The 01X offers the following libraries EB G e EB c En pod K Ej i Library a 2 s Scene 100 D zm Default gt o settings m 00 S Input Patch 33 Dynamics 128 page 100 amp Default N settings S 00 D e Output Patch 33 Effect 1 2 128 page 103 Settings that apply to both 1 and 2 effect units Default settings e 00 E e rJ e Channel 129 page 103 Default settings Default settings Gor Nominal level 0dB C Preset 00 01 Destination for Store T operation e
82. page 100 e illsirigreleolS secedere beet ue sad EMAM ELM a ud AUN C ca Le EFFECT page 102 Inserting an effectn the channeL signal path 2 trt eterne tenerte retener reiten EFFECT PATCH page 102 Bypassing THE CMOCK P aa BYPASS page 102 e Determining whether or not the input channel signal is sent to the Rec bus and stereo bus sss RECBUS ST BUS page 99 E Reference materials Remoto FUNCOMS e M Remote Function List page 84 DISPIAYINGICATIONS sic ccccasicssesssccasteracesensadtcsaccssendstersccsstuastssasesdnndstorscesersds vnsecsvenbstonseesvensidsessusbentstetotavey Mode selection and Display indications page 38 e Checking the list of available EQ Dynamics and Effect programs and their parameters sss Parameter List page 115 Checking the signal flow of the 01X eeeseceseseesesesesseseceescseseesesesessescaeseeseseneeeeeaeaeeeeseneesees Block Diagram End of manual Understanding the indications in the block diagrami conterere terere REO OE e e E e Ee LAE Er cete Hoe E Y DRE page 28 s Usingithe SQO1 online manual terrere ren rr tette c etc nee E dete icti td enu een Installation Guide System requirements for the accessory applications seisseen eitran eeren ei entente tnter ntt Installation Guide Checking the compatible DAW e UT a etn tentent netten n
83. parameters on the software without having to check your computer screen The indicated information differs according to the setting of the NAME VALUE button and the condition of the SELECTED CHANNEL button page 19 18 01X Owner s Manual Channel knobs These knobs mainly control the parameter settings values respectively assigned to them They are also used to exe cute YES or cancel NO operation when a confirmation message appears page 143 By simultaneously holding down the SHIFT button and turning the desired knob you can quickly make broad value changes SEL buttons When the SELECTED CHANNEL button page 19 is on these buttons enable you to select desired channels The SEL button indicator for the currently selected chan nel lights up The channel selected by each SEL button depends on the layer selected in the MIXER LAYER sec tion page 40 When a fader has been assigned to a Group page 101 the Group assignment can be temporarily released by simultaneously holding down the SEL button and moving the fader In the Remote mode the SEL but ton flashes during automation touch in You can manually activate touch out by pressing the SEL button while it is flashing The button can also be used to start touch in manually when the AUTO EDIT button is ON G ON buttons These buttons turn the selected channels on or off The actual function differs depending on the status of the AUTO R W
84. processing No EQ ON OFF 1 8 ON OFF Turns the EQ on or off The L and R settings of the ST IN channel s EQ are No o z 1 linked together ze ATT Attenuate Selected Channel only 96 08B 12 0dB Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB No 6 B EQ LIBRARY Selected Channel only This can be called up by pressing the same EQ button twice in a row For example EQ LOW EQ LOW See EQ High page 98 No EQ HIGH MID INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH MID GAIN EQHM G PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V D Adjusts the gain level Pressing the EQ LOW and EQ HIGH buttons 18 0dB 18 0dB simultaneously resets all band parameters gain frequency and Q for the No selected channel 01X Owner s Manual 97 Function Tree Function List Function name Exolanatlon Prompt Related Block fee settings P P pages diagram E c EQ HIGH MID FREQUENCY EQHL F c g l g 21 2Hz 20 0kHz Adjusts the frequency No EQ LOW Q EQL Q S ou 10 0 0 10 Determines the bandwidth of the EQ processing No 2 c EQ ON OFF 1 8 ON OFF Turns the EQ on or off The L and R settings of the ST IN channel s EQ are No o 3 W linked together ATT Attenuate
85. respectively NOTE e The SHIFT combinations with F1 F2 and F4 are reserved for other functions TRACK MIXER and CLOSE and cannot be programmed 6 Click Apply to enter the settings then click OK onem a cm DI m fj e Some Cubase versions enable you to select Yamaha 01X from the Devices menu 82 01X Owner s Manual The UNDO button performs the same function as Undo in the sequencer allowing you to cancel the last edit made and restore the previous condition of the song You can also execute Redo from the 01X Simply hold down the SHIFT button and press UNDO The last edit you made will be repeated cancelling the just made Undo Saving your song You can also conveniently save your song from the 01X panel by simply pressing the SAVE button For more information on the Remote Functions refer to the Remote Function List page 104 Recording Playback Remote Control 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section kl 923 s _ N D d gt Reference Appendix 83 uoi92ag soiseg usn 910199 ERIEEE pauejs uyay xipuaddy 84 Reference Function Tree Function List This chart shows the names ranges and explanations of all settable parameters in the Internal mode listed in order according to the function tree These parameters can be set not only from
86. the 01X itself but also conveniently from a computer using the included software program Studio Manager see separate Installation Guide and PDF documentation Operation procedures for calling up each parameter display are indicated in the chart button button For information on the Display Indication and mode selection see pages 37 38 For information on the Remote mode see page 104 For information on the Home operation see page 37 To restore the default value of the selected parameter simultaneously hold down the SHIFT button and press the appropri ate channel knob 1 8 N CAUTION Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM while an EXECUTING BACKUP PLEASE KEEP POWER ON message is shown Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM Chart Indications The example below shows and describes the various indications in the Reference chart These indications are for example purposes only and differ from the actual chart Related Block pages diagram Knob Function namel Explanation Prompt settings SCENE MODE SCENE DISPLAY v or SCENE SCENE SCENE 1 SCENE LIBRARY PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A v Determines the Library number Preset Scene numbers and write protected Scenes are indicated by asterisks
87. the same 2 Call up the Utility mode by pressing the UTILITY button 3 Press knob 2 to call up the Patch parameters 4 Select page 6 with the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons Page 6 contains Output Patch settings for the DIGITAL STEREO OUT and STEREO AUX OUT jacks BUT PORT DIGITAL STEREO STEREO AUX Page number current OUT page is 6 of 8 total 01X Owner s Manual 5 Use knob 1 to change the assignment to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack If you want to use the digital output as an aux send set this to AUX1 2 UTILITY LHUN1z21 Using the Aux 1 2 sends for external effects lets you retain the Aux 3 4 sends for the internal effects You ll also need to make other settings such as routing the external effect signal back into the 01X page 88 For more details on using external effects see page 60 If you want to send the stereo mix to the digital output for recording set this to RECBUS UTILITY OUTPUT PATCH D LRECBUS D QUT Make sure to save your important Patch setups to the Output Patch Library so that you can call them up in the future See page 91 Routing audio to specific mLAN outputs You can use the following operation to send audio buses to specific mLAN output pairs For example you can direct the two Aux Out pairs AUX 1 2 AUX 3 4 to separate mLAN outputs You can route the stereo bus and the record bus REC Bus to independent mLAN outputs from this pag
88. the signals from multiple chan nels and send them to an output jack or internal effect input is called a bus Unlike channels which handle only a single signal a bus can combine multiple signals into one or two and send them to a destination This comes from the common meaning of the word a vehicle to carry many passengers simultaneously The 01X s mixer section lets you use the following buses e Stereo buses L R This mixes the input signals to stereo and sends them via the stereo output channel to the rear panel jacks for example STEREO AUX OUT mLAN as selected by Output Patch AUX buses 1 through 4 These combine the signals from the channel inputs ste reo input and mLAN inputs and send them to the rear panel jacks for example STEREO AUX OUT mLAN as selected by Output Patch AUX bus 3 4 can be also used to input the signals to built in effects 1 and 2 e REC bus L R These combine the signals from the channel inputs ste reo input and mLAN inputs and send them via the REC bus output channel to the rear panel jacks for example STEREO AUX OUT mLAN as selected by Output Patch 01X Owner s Manual E Channel A signal routing unit through which a sound that is input to the mixer section is adjusted by volume and pan and then output The mixer section of the 01X provides a total of 28 channels including the Stereo Inputs for the outputs of the two effects B Jitter When digital audio signals
89. to select alternate functions and operations Remote Control Buttons The functions of these buttons may differ depending on your particular software Refer to the Remote Function List page 104 EDIT button LOOP button F1 F8 Function 1 8 buttons UNDO button SAVE button 01X Owner s Manual Reference Getting Started Basics Section Before Using Appendix 19 Controls and Connectors LZ wo a i 17 c a 2 L 39u 13 34 paues Bua uoi2ag soiseg xipuaddy 20 DH YAMAHA ve 00000000 e Ss GIGI O O O CHCHCH HHEH CHCHCH HHEH ee OTE eer OSS Se Qo DCIETETOJ HH HH HHEH HOH GB B ES LEI p o EH HEH OO vooood eto nann ma OOOH Transport Buttons These buttons are used primarily for controlling song play back recording on your DAW software They also let you control the software no matter which mode is selected Remote or Internal The functions are the same as the transport buttons in the software page 104 On the SQO1 for example the buttons function as follows amp lt lt Rewind button Causes the song location to rewind gt gt Forward button Causes the song location to fast forward
90. to select DIN L digital in left and knob 7 to select DIN R digital in right UTILITY INPUT PATCH CIN1 4 CACI J3INi CABS Digital in left is routed to input channel 3 Digital in right is routed to input channel 4 If you intend to use this routing frequently or even just occasionally you should save it to the Input Patch Library so that you can call it up whenever you need it See page 89 01X Owners Manual 61 Before Using Basics Section s 72 i E o Reference Appendix Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 Ld x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy 62 Mixing Tutorial Routing audio to the digital stereo output In the section above you learned how to route digital audio into the 01X In this section we ll see how to send it back out again One common routing would be to send the entire stereo mix to the digital output for recording Another would be to use the digital output as an aux stereo send for external effects Bl Operation CD Connect the digital source to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on the rear panel If you are using the digital output as an aux send make sure your external effect processor has an appropriate digital input If you are recording the stereo mix use the digital input on your recorder DAT deck etc As above the 01 X connectors are S PDIF make sure the device you are connecting has
91. to select the Pan parame ter Adjust the parameter for each channel with the corre sponding knob e If the current Display Mode doesn t show the parameter values you can easily check each by pressing the NAME VALUE but ton To check the Pan setting is press NAME VALUE button 01X Owner s Manual Using the Internal Effects With fully digital four band EQ and Dynamics processors on every input channel there s an an enormous amount of recording and mixing flexibility in this console The 01X doesn t stop there however It also features two indepen dent effect blocks again fully digital and fully integrated Setting up and using the internal effects is essentially a three stage process 1 Set up the effect send routing 2 Select the effect type and edit it if needed 3 Set the master return level and adjust the send level for each channel Once you ve determined what effects to use and how to route them step 3 is all you need to worry about during a mix session Applying the effect to a channel is a simple matter of adjusting the channel send control In this section we ll take you through a simple and com mon example one you re likely to use in your own mixes applying a global reverb effect to the individual channels 1 Effect send routing The 01X features four separate effect send routings AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 and AUX 4 AUX 1 and 2 are used only for external routing t
92. used for Automation Read Write If you want to mute channels with the ON buttons turn AUTO R W off You can also switch the Read Write status for all tracks simultaneously With AUTO R W on hold down the SHIFT button and press the ON button of one of the eight input channels 5 Each press of the button toggles among the settings and the button lights to indicate the Read Write status Off Both Read and Write are off Red Write is enabled Orange Both Read and Write are enabled Green Read is enabled 3 Display the Volume parameter for the track This step isn t necessary for writing but it conveniently lets you see the changes you make in Cubase SX as you make them Click the small button Show Hide Automation at the bottom left of the track then select Volume at the top right You can display other parameters in the same way such as Pan and have them all shown at the same time 4 Start playback 01X Owner s Manual 5 Move the fader to change the volume As soon as you move the fader automation is recorded You ll see in the Cubase SX display that any volume automation recorded previously is replaced with your current moves Keep in mind that you can also adjust the pan setting at the same time by using the channel knob If you want you can record automation for any of the other parameters For example pressing one of the EQ buttons calls up the EQ paramet
93. via internal mixer input module of the 01X sese MONITOR page 96 e Outputting the sound separate from the internal mixer of the 01X using the monitor input sss MONITOR page 96 e Recording individual input channels of the 01X to the DAW see OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL page 90 e Recording a mix of the input channels of the 01X to the DAW sss OUTPUT PATCH mLAN OUT CHANNEL page 90 e Recording channels of the 01X dry and unprocessed or recording with EQ and Dynamics processing DIRECT OUT POSITION page 91 Connecting the DAW o r MIDI sequencer by MIDI rtr rne teeth nbn Re REI RAE RES EE IR EA a ERR eb HAB e Ae page 95 B Adjusting the recording level S Adjusting the Gain Of the analog Input erret treten terere euet inter tete rhe pe DI ber EU Ere er EEE edd Gain knob pages 16 43 e Checking the input signal for clipping n Switching the meter display INPUT METER POINT PRE EQ page 46 Controlling the volume digitally with the 01X Taderal sese DIRECT OUT POSITION page 91 E Editing the song data from the computer DAW Editing the pte or the Vocal esito ete ti ale oie Eo EDO EDU ROUES Pitch Fix Pitch Fix Owner s Manual PDF Controlling the Pitch Fix plug in effect via MIDI data from the host application Using MIDI to change the pitch of a vocal or to switch Scenes eee Pitch Fix Owner s Manual PDF e Using m
94. window SHIFT F5 Displays the Piano Roll window or brings it to the front of the computer screen SHIFT F6 No function S SHIFT F7 Starts the TWE Wave Editor 2 SHIFT F8 Alternately hides shows the Transport window Transport Bar Location Bar Record UNDO Executes the Undo operation m D SHIFT UNDO Executes the Redo operation D When the lamp lights press this so that the lamp flashes Press this again to execute the SAVE Save operation lamp turns off Press F8 to cancel it lights flashes Ks MARKER WRITE Enters clears a Marker at the current song position t 4 Press briefly to move back one measure at a time or hold to continuously rewind o y y c MARKER 4 Moves the song position to the previous Marker gp P p gt Press briefly to move forward one measure at a time or hold to continuously fast for E ward MARKER Moves the song position to the next Marker gp m Press to stop recording or playback Pressing this when playback is stopped goes to the NE top of the song e gt Press to start playback from the current point lights e FOOT SWITCH 1 Playback Stop E 6 or FOOT SWITCH 2 Press this to enter exit from the Recording Standby The gt Play and 8 Rec lamp lights E are turned on during recording ZOOM Turns Zoom on and off lights Cursor ZOOM goes out Moves the cursor indicating the current tr
95. 0 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 127 uoi2ag soiseg usn 910199 92u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Parameter Lists ECHO Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB DLY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB GL 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB GR 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase fe
96. 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 01X Owners Manual 129 uoi2ag soiseg BuisQ 910199 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Parameter Lists HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine PITCH 2 24 to 424 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 100 to 100 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan LEVEL 2 100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time FB G1 99 to 99 Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY 2 0
97. 00 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and early reflected delay balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay TYPE Heer am fe Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY REV 0 100 Delay and reverb balance 0 all delay 100 all reverb REV TIME 0 3
98. 1 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency STEREO DELAY Two input two output basic stereo delay Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB GL 99 to 99 Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB GR 99 to 99 Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency MOD DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DELAY LCR One input two output 3 tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 273
99. 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer 9 stereo 19 E G Dist 2 A variation on preset 18 39 Fine EQ Cass Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape 20 A G Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars 40 Narrator Ideal for recording narration Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 1 1 5 uoi2ag soiseg usn 910199 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 116 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists E Preset EQ Parameters Values Parameter Parameter No Title No Title LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 01 Bass Drum 1 13 Piano 1 F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1 06 kHz 5 30 kHz F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz 7 50 kHz Q 1 2 10 0 9 Q 8 0 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 8 0dB 7 0 dB 46 0 dB ON G 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 02 Bass Drum 2 14 Piano 2 F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2 50kHz 12 5 kHz F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3 15 kHz 5 30 kHz Q 1 4 4 5 2 2 Q 5 6 10 0 7 PEAKING PE
100. 2 3 Switches the automation status of the selected channel only that channel in order M ON AUTO R W lights Latch Touch Read and Off lights goes out 2 SHIFT ON AUTO R W lights Switches the automation status Read Off of all channels lights goes out 2 7 8 D AUTO EDIT E the function of the SEL button to the touch in function This button flashes ights Ee uring automation touch in 7 o SOLO Changes the function of the ON button to the Solo function ights l REC RDY Changes the function of the ON button to the REC RDY function ights AUTO R W Changes the function of the ON button to the AUTO R W function ights Makes the Global View mode active and displays the Audio track with the Multi Channel AUDIO S Ra ights 9 view Pressing this again restores the normal track display INST Makes the Global View mode active and displays the Audio Instrument track with the ights 9 Multi Channel view Pressing this again restores the normal track display 9 3 Makes the Global View mode active and displays the MIDI track with the Multi Channel MIDI ights 9 oO view Pressing this again restores the normal track display gt Makes the Global View mode active and displays the AUX object BUS object AUDIO BUS AUX OUTPUT object with the Multi Channel view ights 9 Pressing this alternates among the following displays in order Bus Track Aux Track 9 Output Track and Normal Track
101. 2 Sigo 9r obed AH3SNI E 77 O3u318 aS H313N e 9 11 130 9277 6 LndNI hz FZ LLnO 193410 E fluo epow zepyL ZHYeb E ale NX U eje s 210343 reri aagi C 7 m 75 ZL d d3 La ANIS 183SNI no Ngu Z L Sngo3u g fre 4 omas 4 SA 19344 77 Rn e 1 S Enie t i uaan L93443 Q l L X ZHXZ 88 ZH96 oa g X Ul 091315 Pog 0N3S 4H3SNI 103443 h 1X4 H T lt 3 lt 1 xnv g ixnv mj i panies En i 193443 D c 7 92190 o uid i NE OD po m O3aNvar b la Gavosvo sng o uoyonpey ure Q o o GE us e T NI zd lous TVIXYO9 at T A T DNLS NI O3H31S TVLIDIC Hu sngoaH H 3 z 3 ec T T S m ANO 8 11dNI lt pe mM 25 a 7sngsoad amp 7 11no 103uia T o gt n 13 37 1361 o ine 8 X ul QUO 9 9 omw 3NIT H313N o t1 i oo uoyonpey ureo ee av o Pd uogonpet ureo QS no zu a ripam av eoat LNM eus tt 4 e H Mem JN f y SONYN 69 anvar b LY L J6 lt g orpo TT TH SOIN o3 anvar He 1 e ny send Nb o T o omw aN K N O3H3lS X T Ls T T oie o o LUASNI an jm z eoi U313A S 0 d 1 1 NA av av onl inani a g I1 een o3 away H T teal 87 LNdNI 1 O3YALS zuna PR BP Agb 5 33 9 595 WOLNVHd RES E a 8 3 LAdNI ANIT OIN 2j 55 m SS mr weeg 420 g For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the autho
102. 60 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2445 This document is printed on chlorine free ECF p
103. 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 r x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy 14 Using the transport controls These buttons let you control Cubase in the same way as using a tape recorder Rewind Fast forward Stop Play Record mom Oscrus Dial This is like a jog shuttle wheel on a video deck and gives you an even faster way to move the song position in the window No matter what window is active you can use these to con trol song playback recording and navigate through the song Also keep in mind that all of your computer shortcut keys are active if you want to use them even while using the 01X as a remote control Using markers Hold down MARKER and use the 4 rewind P gt gt fast forward buttons If you ve set up markers in the song these can be used to jump among the marker points Previous marker MARKER IENS Next marker cfc EUR 01X Owner s Manual Programming markers If you haven t set up a marker or want to program a new one you can do this from the 01X too Move to the desired song position then press the WRITE button A new marker is set for the current postion Cycle playback In Cubase SX you can loop playback between the left and right locators To turn this on off press the LOOP but ton EDIT F1 F4 o UNDO LJ Loop EU F2 F3 TRACK CLOSE F6 LJLJ LP L Li OF o Selecting and ar
104. 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 135 uoi2ag soiseg usn 910199 32u919J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Parameter Lists DELAY gt REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 100 Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DIST gt DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description DST TYPE BE ce Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdriv
105. AKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 4 5 dB 2 0 dB 5 5 dB 40 5 dB 2 5 dB 03 Snare Drum 1 15 E G Clean F 132Hz 1 00 kHz 3 15 kHz 5 00 kHz F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1 32 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 1 2 4 5 0 11 Q 0 18 10 6 3 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 5 dB 8 5 dB 42 5 dB 4 0 dB 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 2 0 dB 04 Snare Drum 2 16 E G Crunch 1 F 180Hz 335 Hz 2 36 kHz 4 00 kHz F 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz Q 10 0 7 0 1 Q 8 4 5 0 63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 7 5 dB 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 2 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 05 Tom tom 1 17 E G Crunch 2 F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4 50 kHz 6 30 kHz F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz Q 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 8 0 4 0 16 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 5 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 06 Cymbal 18 E G Dist 1 F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1 06 kHz 13 2 kHz F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 8 0 9 Q 9 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 2 5 dB 1 0 dB 0 5 dB 6 0 dB 8 5 dB 4 5 dB 4 0 dB 07 High Hat 19 E G Dist 2 F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2 80 kHz 7 50 kHz F 315 Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 0 5 1 Q 10 4 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H
106. America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B 01X Owners Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply AC power adaptor Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required e Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into e Use the specified adaptor PA 300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha any openings only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands overheating e Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it a e Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sou
107. Audio is not detected from the application DAW audio sequencer etc For Windows Make sure mLAN has not been turned off On the task bar right click mLAN Manager mLAN icon then select ON Confirming the installation Installation Guide mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Make sure the 01X is connected to the mLAN cable and is powered on Start mLAN Auto Connector or mLAN Graphic Patchbay then re connect the device EAR Confirming the installation Installation Guide mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual For Macintosh To use an iBook or PowerBook in the system connect the 01X to the Macintosh using an mLAN cable turn on the power to the 01X then start the Macintosh Make sure the mLAN settings are correct vrer The mLAN connection does not work E The computer processing speed is too slow R The computer s CPU meter indicates a heavy processing load E Playback response is delayed Make sure your computer satisfies the system requirements System Requirements Installation Guide For Windows If you do not use the mLAN system on the task bar right click mLAN Manager mLAN icon then select OFF mLAN quits re Confirming the installation Installation Guide Try reducing the number of audio channels in mLAN Auto Connector or Graphic Patchbay arp Connecting the Computer and mLAN devices via mLAN Installation Guide m
108. Channel Mod gnisig ule and Software Synthesizer Module ON when SOLO lamp is on Turns the Solo function of each channel on or off Applies to the Channel Module Soft lights goes out 9 ware Synthesizer Module This sets all channels excepting the master channel to the same Solo status as the chan SHIFT ON nel whose ON button was pressed Pressing it again turns Solo for all channels x p L ag lights goes out 2 when SOLO lamp is on excepting the master channel on or off simultaneously Applies to the Channel Mod gnis g ule and Software Synthesizer Module ON This switches the automation status for each channel in order Off unlit Read green lights goes out AUTO R W lights Touch orange and Latch red gnts g SHIFT ON This sets all channels to the same automation status as the channel whose ON button AUTO RWI lights was pressed The settings are changed in order Off unlit Read green Touch orange lights goes out 9 and Latch red AUTO EDIT Changes the function of the SEL button to the touch in function This button flashes lights during automation touch in SOLO Changes the function of the ON button to the Solo function lights SHIFT SOLO Determines the Solo Mute settings of the selected tracks g SHIFT REC RDY Determines the recording on or off settings of the selected tracks AUTO R W Changes the function of the ON button to the AUTO R W function lights Starts the Au
109. Channel Send levels If any of these are set to o you may not hear any effect sound 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix Mixing Tutorial Using external effects wo Sg With all of the EQ Dynamics and Effect processing avail d able within the 01X itself you can do all your recording E and mixing without ever having the need for an external d effect unit Still you may have a favorite reverb delay or other effect device that you d love to patch into the system Here s how to do it co 5 e 8 co D E Bl Operation S D Connect the STEREO AUX OUT jacks to the inputs on your effect unit Fig 1 If the effect unit has only one input use just one of the outputs on the 01X or use a Y adaptor to sum the ste reo signals to mono Fig 2 If your effect device has digital inputs you may want to o wo z E K N o c wo 23 use these instead to avoid sound degradation Con nect the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on the 01X to the digital input on the device Fig 3 a D A e D Fig 1 STEREO AUX OUT 3 R D UNBAL 10dBV gt INPUT a R kzi T amp Effect Unit x Fig 2 STEREO AUX OUT STEREO AUX OUT a a UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV or INPUT INPUT Effect Unit Effect Unit 60 01X Owner s Manual Fig 3 DIGITAL STEREO OUT IN DIGITAL IN
110. E Stop button Stops playback or recording of the song By connecting an optional Foot Switch page 23 you can also control this by foot Q9 gt Play button Starts song playback If the Record button is On record ing will begin By connecting an optional Foot Switch page 23 you can also control this by foot 6 Record button Enables recording standby Pressing this again cancels recording standby 01X Owner s Manual o d HS Oscrus e WRITE 2 oss D iB O zoom I M P MARKER button To enter a marker at a selected location in the song turn this button on and press the WRITE button Move to the next marker location by using MARKER and the gt gt Forward button Move to the previous marker location by using MARKER and the 4 Rewind button To delete a marker move to the location of the marker and press the MARKER and WRITE but ton again EB ZOOM button When the 01X is set to Remote mode this button turns Zoom on and off D Cursor lt gt v Left Right Up Down buttons For moving the cursor and navigating in the DAW display Dial Rotary Encoder Moves the song position pointer line SCRUB button When this is set to on the dial can be used for the Scrub function Rear Pane
111. EDIT lights Fader touch in page 15 flashes ON in normal status Turns each channel off or on mutes unmutes the signal lights goes out 2 SHIFT ON in normal status Turns all the channels on lights 2 12 13 ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 SHIFT ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for all channels to off lights goes out 2 12 ON REC RDY lights Sets the REC RDY of each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 ON AUTO R W lights Switches the automation status of the selected channel only that channel in order Off lights goes out 14 Read and Read Write Switches the automation status of all channels in order Off Read Read Write Write SHIFT ON AUTO R W lights or Off Write Write Read Read lights goes out 2 14 Changes the function of the SEL button to the touch in function This button flashes AUTO EDIT during automation touch in ights SOLO Changes the function of the ON button to the Solo function ights REC RDY Changes the function of the ON button to the REC RDY function ights AUTO R W Changes the function of the ON button to the AUTO R W function ights BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication every eight channels SHIFT BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication channel by channel FLIP Exchanges the functions between the Channel Knobs and the Fader
112. Eua Onur Ojo rs rs m ore Ose DC o0 OD za UTILITY button This button selects the UTILITY mode enabling you to set the global settings for the entire system page 86 Press ing UTILITY from any of the Utility pages automatically calls up the Menu Select display page 87 MONITOR A B button This indicates and can be used to set the balance between the levels of the stereo output of the internal mixer and the stereo output from the DAW software to the monitor out headphones Pressing the switch alternates between the two settings A lamp is lit and B lamp is off The set ting can be changed by holding the MONITOR A B but ton and turning the appropriate knob 5 or 7 SELECTED CHANNEL button This button switches between the Selected Channel mode the lamp lights and Multi Channel mode the lamp is off e Selected Channel mode In this mode the display shows several parameters or functions for a single selected channel selected by pressing the SEL button page 17 e Multi Channel mode In this mode the display shows a single parameter or function for all eight channels in the selected layer EQ buttons These buttons call up the display for the EQ settings of each channel page 96 The attenuation for each Input Channel can also be adjusted in each page in the Selected Channel mode
113. F G and H If necessary use the corresponding knobs 5 8 to set the desired Groups to ENA enable 8 Press the GROUP button repeatedly to call up the Mute Group display GEP B GRP B GRP C 4 Assign each channel to the desired Group E H by using the corresponding channel knob If the channel is one of a pair the setting will automati cally be made for both channels gt e The Group function can be a handy arranging tool or even a composition technique particularly with looped based music or long repeating sections Assign similar tracks to the same groups and make sure one of each group is represented on the current set of channels ex 1 8 Then work the four master faders and ON buttons while the music is playing and create an arrangement in real time Creating and Recalling Scenes Scenes are digital snapshots of your mixing work They allow you to save all settings in a mix including EQ Dynamics Effects Groups and more and call them up instantly whenever you need them There are 99 Scene memory locations for your custom mixes and if you need more you can save them to your computer by using the Studio Manager See page 9 and Studio Manager PDF manual Scenes are a great way to avoid reinventing the wheel Once you ve got a perfect mix of a certain set of instru ments for a certain type of music ideal compression and EQ for bass and drums delay and reverb just
114. K setting appropriate ranr Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide E The mLAN connection does not work e Has the driver been installed Installation Guide s the mLAN cable properly connected Check the connec tion disconnect the mLAN cable once then insert it again For Windows Is mLAN set to ON From the taskbar right click on the mLAN Manager icon n Confirming the installation Installation Guide For Windows When adding a new IEEE 1394 card right click on the mLAN Manager icon in the taskbar and select ON m Confirming the installation Installation Guide Is the ACTIVE lamp on the rear panel of the 01X lit in blue If it is not lit check the followings In mLAN Driver Setup from taskbar right click on the mLAN Manager icon then Driver Setup is the Status indicator blue If not restart the 01X and re enable connection by using mLAN Auto Connector or Graphic Patchbay Confirming the installation Installation Guide Graphic Patchbay Online Manual s mLAN AUTO W CLK Auto Wordclock on the 01X set to ENABLE rra Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Has connection been enabled with mLAN Auto Connector or Graphic Patchbay Re enable connection if necessary IM Connecting the Computer and mLAN devices via mLAN Installation Guide mLAN Connection Settings Graphic
115. KKKKKKKK x x Velocity Note ON x x Note OFF x x EE NR Ch s x x Control 0 95 102 119 x Change Prog 127 a Assignable Change True kk d kk ck kk x x i x x x x System Clock xX x Real Time Commands x x Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset mLAN MIDI 5 Port amp NO ASSIGN SCENE CTL Mode Only Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO o Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 01X Owner s Manual Display Messages Display Messages Messages Information SURE This prompt asks if you want to execute the operation or change the setting Final confirmation Channel number flashes alternately with These channels cannot be used while 01X is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz operation Do you want to initialize backup data This prompt asks if you want to initialize the backup data page 86 ERROR Backup Data Crashed Do you want to initialize backup data Because the power was turned off while data was being written to Flash ROM during a Please keep power on message the backup data must be initialized page 86 The prompt asks if you want to initialize the backup data EXECUTING BACKUP PLEASE KEEP POWER ON Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze due to co
116. Knee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points ue Expander Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz E Release E 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz s 3 ms 21 2 s 160 points 96 kHz a Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points E Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Compander H Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points 44 1 kHz e 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz Release 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz o 3 ms 21 2 s 160 points 96 kHz c Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 X21 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Compander S Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step E 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points 44 1 kHz s 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz Release 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 2 s 160 points 96 kHz Threshold 54 dB 0 dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 dB 0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz Hold Ducking 0 01 ms 1 07 s 216 points O 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 980 ms 216 points 96 kHz 6 ms 46 1 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points O 48 kHz Decay 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21
117. L in normal status Selects a channel lights goes out 12 SEL SEL flashes Fader touch out page 15 M SEL AUTO EDIT lights Fader touch in page 15 flashes ON in normal status Turns each channel off or on mutes unmutes the signal lights goes out 2 32 SHIFT ON in normal status Turns all channels on lights 2 32 ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 SHIFT ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for all channels to off goes out 2 ON REC RDY lights Sets the REC RDY of each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 SHIFT ON REC RDY lights Sets the REC RDY of all channels to off goes out 2 AUTO EDIT PAT AAE E m SEL button to the touch in function This button flashes lights SOLO Changes the function of the ON button to the Solo function lights REC RDY Changes the function of the ON button to the REC RDY function lights AUTO R W ON This arms or activates fader automation lights 2 AUTO R W Knob o S 2s the parameters assigned to the respective knobs This is not indi _ AUDIO Assigns a Track to a Fader INST Assigns a Track to a Fader MIDI Assigns a Track to a Fader BUS AUX Assigns an AUX BUS to a Fader OTHER Assigns output level adjustment of the Virtual Main Bus to the Faders BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication every eight channels SHIFT BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication channel
118. L but ton Reference MUTE GROUP MT GRP PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V Input Channel or Output Channel ON buttons can be grouped There are four E through H Channel Mute groups When channel ON buttons are grouped pressing any one of them turns the ON buttons for all the grouped channels on or off A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped ON buttons x GRP E F G H No f you add one channel from a pair to a group the pair partner is automat ically added to the group You can also select a channel on another Layer by switching Layers f you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off first turn ENABLE below off or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group Appendix GROUP ENABLE PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V D ENA This parameter enables ENA or disables the Groups When the group is set to disable the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled No 01X Owners Manual 101 Function Tree Function List Function name settings CH PAIR Channel Pair Explanation Prompt Related Block pages diagram PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V Hulsp 910190 PAIRED uoi2ag soiseg st 76 Faders and most parameters of adjacent odd even channels or Aux buses are linked for stereo operation When th
119. LAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Try increasing the latency value ar Changing the Settings after Installation Installation Guide For Macintosh If a dual CPU model awakes from Sleep or Suspend mode processing speed may be slowed In this event restart the computer For Windows Refer to Hints when using audio data Windows eee Installation Guide Troubleshooting e For Windows The condition may improve if you set Hyper Threading to Disable Using mLAN Graphic Patchbay try reducing the number of devices connected to the computer mLAN Connection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual For Macintosh Turn off virtual memory For Macintosh Disable Apple Talk E Inconsistency in wordclock or unable to exit from Auto Connector For Windows Mobile computers with Intel CPU SpeedStep technology is applied for some CPU s CPU for notebook PC Please disable the SpeedStep technology when mLAN is employed SpeedStep M technology changes CPU clock dynamically depending on the loading on the CPU to save the power consumption How to disable the SpeedStep technology In almost all of the PC s BIOS has a function to select enabling or disabling the SpeedStep technology Please refer to the PC s operating manual or make inquiry to the PC manufacturer E Cannot close the applications or shut down the computer operating system E Cannot chang
120. LAY HIGH MID me UD OD DISPLAY wr e If the current Display Mode doesn t show the parameter values you can easily check each by pressing the NAME VALUE but ton To check the Q value emis press NAME VALUE button EQ parameters ranges Gain Determines the amount of level boost or cut in the sig nal at the frequency specified below Range 18 0 dB 18 dB Frequency Determines the central frequency at which the signal is boosted or cut Range 21 2 Hz 20 0 kHz Q Determines the bandwidth of the EQ processing The larger the value the greater the range of affected fre quencies around the central frequency the smaller the value the narrower the frequency range Range Settings 10 0 wide 0 10 narrow L SHL HPF LOW band only H SHL LPF HIGH band only NOTE j For details on the Range Settings see pages 96 117 a gt By using the included Studio Manager software you can view and edit all EQ parameters graphically See the Studio Manager PDF manual 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 2 i e o Reference Appendix 49 Mixing Tutorial usn 910199 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 Ld x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy Hints on using EQ In general cut rather than boost For example if you want to make a sound br
121. MIC LINE IN to STEREO OUT 96 kHz Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 0 02 96 1kHz LINE IN to STEREO OUT Dynamic Range 103 dB LINE IN to STEREO OUT Noise level 105 dBV Crosstalk 70 dB DA converter 24 bit Linear 128 times oversampling 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling 88 2 96 kHz AD converter 24 bit Linear 128 times oversampling 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling 88 2 96 kHz Internal Signal Processing 32 bit Accumulator 58 bit Number of memories Preset Area User Area Scene Library 99 Channel Library 2 127 EQ Library 40 160 Dynamics Library 40 88 Effect 1 2 Library 43 85 Input Patch Library 1 32 Output Patch Library 1 32 Mixer Functions 28 ch Digital Mixing 44 1 48 kHz 18 ch Digital Mixing 88 2 96 kHz Input MIC LINE Input 8 ch with 1 channel switchable to HI Z Input mLAN Input 16 ch 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 8ch 88 2 kHz 96 kHz mLAN Stereo Input 2 ch Stereo one system is cascade connected to the Monitor Out The Mix Balance between mLAN Monitor Input mLAN Monitor Input and Stereo Output can be adjusted Stereo Input Stereo two systems combined use with Effect return 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Stereo one system 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Digital Input Stereo one system Digital Cascade Input Stereo one system is cascade connected to the Stereo Bus with attenuator Oscillator Sine 100 Hz 1 kHz
122. NG H SHELF C G 2 0dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB G 5 5dB 41 5 dB 6 0 dB 0 0 dB c5 29 Chorus amp 37 Piano Low Harmo F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 2 8 2 0 7 ri Q 10 6 3 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING e G 0 5dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 6 5 dB G 5 5dB 1 5 dB 45 0 dB 3 0 dB 30 Total EQ 1 38 Piano High Ed F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2 12 kHz 16 0 kHz F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz D Q 7 2 2 5 6 Q 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 e PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 4 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 6 0 dB G 1 5dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 3 0 dB 31 Total EQ 2 39 Fine EQ Cass F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz F 75 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00kHz 12 5 kHz Q 7 2 8 5 6 Q 4 5 1 8 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF x G 1 5dB 40 5 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB G 40dB 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB Ez 32 Total EQ 3 40 Narrator F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2 50 kHz 10 0 kHz x Q 0 28 o Q 4 7 0 63 B EQ Parameters LOW HPF LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH LPF 0 1 10 0 41 points 0 1 10 0 41 points a low shelving HPF DUEB Gl Bola high shelving LPF F 21 2 Hz 20 kHz 1 12 oct step 18 dB 0 1 dB step 18 dB 0 1 dB step 18 dB 0 1 dB step HPF on off LPF on off 01X Owners Manua
123. Output Patch SHIFT and press the knob To actually assign the desired number press the 00 32 knob The Patch assignments are stored with the Scene 3 RECALL SAFE papers fura This function allows you to exempt certain channels from being changed when recalling a Scene Set the channel s you wish to keep unchanged to ENABLE To set the stereo master channel press the SEL button of the ENABLE STEREO channel and press knob 8 To return to normal selection press any 11 8 one of the channel SEL buttons The Recall Safe settings are stored with No disable the Scene ERITETETE T The parameters affected by Recall Safe are channel fader level channel on off pan EQ Dynamics Aux Send on off Aux Send Pre Post and Aux Send level UTILITY MODE UTILITY BACKUP SHIFT UTILITY This operation saves the current settings of the 01X to internal memory so that when the device is turned on again all previous settings are restored automati cally xipuaddy 7 NO The following settings are NOT memorized by Backup Yes The parameter display status NAME VALUE setting or meter indication The channel display status Selected Channel or Multi Channel The Flip status Remote mode status and all Remote mode settings N CAUTION e Parameters that cannot be stored in Libraries and parameters that you have not yet saved can
124. PUT Effect Unit 2 Connect the output s of the effect unit to the MIC LINE input s on the 01X Again if you are using a digital effect device connect the digital output on the device to the DIGITAL STE REO IN jack on the 01X 8 Route the desired channel s for applying effects to AUX 1 or 2 You should also set the send levels see page 100 4 Route AUX 1 or 2 to the appropriate output s DIGI TAL STEREO or STEREO AUX in the OUTPUT PATCH page of the UTILITY mode see page 91 Make sure that the input channels from the effect unit are NOT routed to AUX 1 or 2 Feedback may result 5 Set the levels of the input channels Input and Output Patching With all its ins and outs the 01X is an exceptionally flexi ble mixer adaptable to a wide range of applications and setups The key to tapping into all that flexibility and power is in the Patch parameters These let you manage your ins and outs internally within the 01X and even let you store your often used routings to the Patch Libraries Here are some examples to get you started Routing the digital stereo input to two channel inputs The 01X is an all digital mixer with all internal processing done digitally If you have a digital source you want to record or mix such as a CD MD player or DAT deck it only makes sense to keep it in the digital realm throughout the recording mixing session Naturally you can apply EQ Dynamics and effe
125. Press the ON button of the desired channel All other channels are muted their lamps turn off except the selected channel Continue to add other channels to the solo as desired in the same way NOTE L You can select the Solo Mode single channel or multiple chan nel that suits your purpose or application page 96 3 To cancel the Solo function for the channel press the ON button again 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 72 i z o Reference Appendix 51 usn 910199 uoi2ag soiseg o 1 E K N o m 1 25 93u319J8y xipuaddy Mixing Tutorial Using Dynamics applying compression etc The Dynamics effects of the 01X provide useful powerful ways to process the sound both during and after recording They can be used to tame excessively wild sounds or expand and enhance less lively sounds About Dynamics and Compression Of all the aspects of modern music production com pression is one of the least understood This is mainly because the sonic results are so subtle and hard to dis tinguish Compression is a type of dynamics loudness process ing and affects the dynamic range of a signal in other words the difference between the softest and loudest sounds of the signal Other dynamics processors include gates expanders and limiters A compressor squeezes the dynamic range of a sound making
126. Remote Control Audio setup Device Setup CD From the Devices menu select Device Setup A SB Live MIDI Synth x All MIDI Inputs s ED B SB Live MIDI Synth Select VST Multitrack from the list Default MIDI Port e e Device Setup A SB Live MIDI Synth c3 o e e 2 xxm co 2 A Apply E S LE Viest larta Do not select the unnumbered mLAN MIDI port this corresponds to Port 1 and is reserved for the remote control functions EL NN Resa ox J coace o 1 zt K N pa o P wo 5 Select All MIDI Inputs from the list at left From the Setup tab disable mLAN MIDI In Ports 1 3 Click on the Setup tab if necessary zm and 4 8 wo c 4 Specify the ASIO Driver s CEE 2 Click on the arrow to call up the pop up menu Select SB Live MIDI Synth E S Es ASIO mLAN from the list 3 S SB Live MIDI UART Ye rv S S VIA MIDI Extemal Port DieciMusic mLAN MIDI In Mackie Control mLAN MIDI In 2 Device Setup mLAN MIDI In 3 mLAN MIDI In 4 mLAN MIDI In 5 A SB Live MIDI Synth em mLAN MIDI In 6 All MIDI Inputs El mLAN MIDI In 7 B SB Live MIDI Synth D mLAN MIDI In 8 Default MIDI Ports DitectMusic ASIO Direct Full Duplex Driver LZ Port 1 is the unnumbered selection Make sure the set EU tings correspond to the example above Ports 2 and 3
127. SS D nx o N D Channel knob SteelG CleanG CleanG DistGt DistGt INTERNAL _ EEE PRN PHH 6 3 3 05 3 95 6 6 4 85 3 05 3 65 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 3 6 T 1 Fader T 8 18 B SteelBs CleanBaCleanGl 8 18 S REMOTE GteDistGt papers fura NAME VALUE SCENE INTERNAL C Scene SCENE EQ PAN DYNAMICS SEND GROUP ENABLE REMOTE g0uaiajay REMOTE D Utility MENU SELECT UTILITY MENU SELECT REMOTE PATCH W CLK D I40 05C MIDI xipuaddy UTILITY UTILITY SCENE EFFECT INTERNAL UTILITY REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP Channel UTILITY UTILITY SHIFT REMOTE FUNCTION REMOTE SELECT knob 1 GENERAL PREF MONI UTILITY CGNRL RMT 3 2 i6 DISPLAY A V Channel knob 2 UTILITY INPUT PATCH cIH1 4 CADI J4INi IRD2 J IN2 L J4IM3 RD4 UTILITY ive IHING DISPLAY A V E Monitor Channel knob 8 UTILITY MONITOR AW INT gt 26 BEDRU UTILITY H Library Ex Scene Library The current last recalled Library No Title Edit display page 41 Channel SCENE H knob 1 4 Ei Library No Name of desired selection Select this by using the Channel knob
128. ST Track Parameter View 9 EB Knobs 1 8 Turn the knob to select the desired instrument for insertion indication flashes then 5 turning pressing press the knob to actually enter the selected setting e S o Knobs 1 8 pressing s A e Knob to which the Instrument is assigned Calls up the parameter page and displays the Editor window on Logic e Knobs 1 8 turning E e r Parameter page For editing parameters x Knobs 1 8 pressing nobs 1 E u Parameter page Reset the parameter value to the default Some parameters cannot be reset DISPLAY A v c Cursor lt gt Changes the page Page is displayed at the right of the LCD e Parameter page SHIFT INST TReturn to the INSTRUMENT mode c No function Led WRITE eD E Cubase NUENDO On the 01X set Remote Select page 87 in the Utility mode to CUBASE E3 Notes D Butt Funct LED E utton unction page 114 E In all modes NAME VALUE Changes the indication of the parameter name and its value DISPLAY v Calls up the next previous page SHIFT DISPLAY Calls up the first page SHIFT DISPLAY v Calls up the last page E SHIFT REMOTE Enters the mode for Multi Part Editor Remote operation Press REMOTE button to can flashes 5 5 cel the mode wo SEL in normal status Selects a channel lights goes out 2 flashes SEL SEL flashes Fader touch out page 15 goes out SEL AUTO
129. Setup x need to make the appropriate MIDI and audio settings in 2 So e A SB Live MIDI Synth Cubase SX ES All MIDI Inputs B SB Livel MIDI Synth CM MotorMis Default MIDI Ports Serene Fence MIDI setup DirectMusic Mackie Control S CD From the Devices menu select Device Setup e 2 Select Default MIDI Ports from the list E Steinbera Houston e Tascam US 428 3 Time Display 3 Click on the Setup tab if necessary amaha Oly e Veer ten ra 4 Set the MIDI Input and Output ports Click on the arrow to call up the pop up menu If you wish to use the 01X as a MIDI interface as well using the separate MIDI A or B terminal on the rear panel set these to mLAN MIDI Port 2 or 3 You can also select a USB MIDI port here depending on your computer and 4 Select Mackie Control from the Devices list then the particular USB device you are using E 923 s _ Nn D x CS oS click on the setup tab Device Setup 5 Set the MIDI Input and Output ports a Select the unnumbered mLAN MIDI port this corre sponds to Port 1 for the remote control functions E e cc Click OK to finish Tot jj For details on which mLAN MIDI port numbers are available for the 01X see page 95 E cs 2 E Ree f ox f Cancet For details on which mLAN MIDI port numbers are available for the 01X see page 95 01X Owners Manual 67 Recording Playback
130. UP MONITOR PAGE SELECTED CHANNEL LIBRARY EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH PAN CH PARAM DS SEND INST DYNAMICS PLUG IN GROUP EFFECT MIXER LAYER AUDIO 1 8 INST 9 16 mLAN MIDI 17 24 mLAN BUS AUX MASTER OTHER FUNCTION F1 TRACK F2 MIXER F3 LIST F4 CLOSE F5 F6 F7 F8 DISPLAY UP DOWN DISPLAY SHIFT NAME VALUE METER BANK lt gt CHANNEL SEL 1 8 STEREO SEL ON 1 8 SOLO REC RDY AUTO EDIT AUTO R W TRANSPORT REWIND FORWARD STOP PLAY RECORD LOOP MARKER MARKER WRITE CURSOR UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT ZOOM Others EDIT UNDO SAVE FLIP SHIFT SCRUB Display LCD 55 x 2 character LCD backlit E Others Supplied Accessories Power Adaptor PA 300 Owner s Manual set CD ROM x 2 mLAN IEEE 1394 cable Power Consumption 21W Dimensions 453 W x 391 D x 116 H mm including channel knobs height Weight 6 2 kg Operating free air temperature range 10 35 C Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer 150 01X Owner s Manual Numerics 01X Channel Module Basics Section sss 28 A About This Manual esses enne nnne 7 A CCESSOTIES iere eie rene aec
131. URROUND 9 Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 18 Knobs 1 8 pressing For editing parameters Resets the parameter value to its default 22 SEND mode SEND lame e SEND gt SEND Selected Channel mode 9 ES Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 18 E Knobs 1 8 pressing For editing parameters Resets the parameter value to its default 22 cc PLUG IN mode SHIFT PLUG IN ante 94 SHIFT PLUG IN gt SHIFT PLUG IN Selected Channel mode 9 SHIFT DISPLAY v Changes the Plug in number ii Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 18 34 Knobs 1 8 pressing For editing parameters Resets the parameter value to its default 22 34 XS m EQ mode EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH gt lights 2 EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH Selected Channel mode 9 in the Selected Channel mode EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH Band mode Knobs 1 8 Band mode For editing each frequency band Faders Band mode For editing the gain of each Band SHIFT DISPLAY v Changes the EQ number 11 DYNAMICS Compressor mode DYNAMICS fone DYNAMICS DYNAMICS Selected Channel mode 9 SHIFT DISPLAY A v Changes a DYN number STA Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 18 Knobs 1 8 pressing For editing parameters Resets the parameter value to its def
132. UT1 8 lt INPUT 9 24 1 mL1 mL167 INSERT ON LEVEL S o mLANIN h 4BAND EQ wos 1 N METERS Gain Reduction roto Mono in X 16 ote T 96kHz 88 2kHz X 8 DIRECT o OUT 24 mLAN INPUT 16 gt mLANIN IEEE 1394 2 gt mLAN STEREO IN MONITOR IN to MONITOR CASCADE 1 Wordclock 96kHz 88 2kHz 16 2 Wordclock 96kHz 88 2kHz 8 73 Studio Manager only 28 01X Owner s Manual 01X Channel Module The included 01X Channel Module is a special plug in effect that reproduces the Dynamics and four band EQ processing of these input channels using the process ing power of your computer refer to the separate Instal lation Guide You can use the 01X Channel Module on your DAW independently from the 01X For example when recording you can apply Dynamics and EQ to the 01X s monitor sound only and record dry to the DAW then play back the track processing it with the 01X Channel Module as needed all without the 01X Refer to the DIRECT OUT POSITION on page 91 and the 01X Channel Module PDF manual Stereo input channels 1 2 These are stereo input channels used mainly for inputting the return signal from internal effects 1 2 However the input signal assignment can be changed in the input patch section allowing these to be used as additional input chan nels The level return level of the stereo input channels can be controlled by using the channel faders 7 for
133. VEL 0 100 Output level S b 7 DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect amp Parameter Range Description DSTTYPE DES RC d Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive t MASTER 0 100 Master volume 7 TONE 10 to 10 Tone E N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction z ce AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator k Parameter Range Description E AMP TYPE S Guitar amp simulation type 2 DST TYPE Be eae Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive cc DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control CAB DEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth Appendix EQF 100 8 00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Parameter Range Description SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0 100 Output Level 1 6ms 46 0s fs 44 1kHz 5ms
134. X1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 mLAN OUT AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 ST BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS RECBUS STEREO ST ST STEREO AUX1 2 z AUX3 4 m mLAN DIRECT OUT When ST BUS RECBUS AUX1 4 is unassigned to mLAN Out Direct Out 1 2 mLAN Out 1 2 Fixed Direct Out 3 4 mLAN Out 3 4 Fixed Direct Out 5 6 mLAN Out 5 6 Fixed Direct Out 7 8 mLAN Out 7 8 Fixed Direct Out 9 10 mLAN Out 9 10 Fixed Direct Out 11 12 mLAN Out 11 12 Fixed Direct Out 13 14 mLAN Out 13 14 Fixed Direct Out 15 16 mLAN Out 15 16 Fixed Direct Out 17 18 mLAN Out 17 18 Fixed Direct Out 19 20 mLAN Out 19 20 Fixed Direct Out 21 22 mLAN Out 21 22 Fixed Direct Out 23 24 mLAN Out 23 24 Fixed 01X Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 1 Ports The mLAN MIDI ports 1 4 and 5 are used to communicate via MIDI with the 01X The mLAN MIDI ports 2 and 3 are connected directly to the MIDI A and MIDI B terminals of the 01X and do not communicate via MIDI with the 01X 2 Function Outline MIDI is used with the 01X for the following purposes pro grams Studio Manager Controlling the DAW software Controlling the Multi Part Editor Recalling preset Library Scenes via program change messages The port related functions are assigned to specific ports as indicated in the chart below mLAN MIDI Port Func
135. Y v Up Down buttons For selecting the various display pages in order as indi cated in the Function Tree page 84 D PAGE SHIFT button Holding down the PAGE SHIFT button and pressing the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons allows you to jump to certain pages such as the first in a particular parameter category See the Reference section for details D AUTO EDIT Automation Edit button When this button is set to on in the remote mode you can manually activate touch in page 15 by using the SEL button on each channel P AUTO R W Automation Read Write button When this button is set to on in the Remote mode you can switch the automation mode page 15 by using the ON button of each channel p SOLO button When this button is set to on you can solo individual chan nels by using the corresponding ON buttons Solo can be turned on for just one or any number of channels as desired by pressing the appropriate ON buttons P REC RDY Record Ready button When this button is set to on in the remote mode you can switch Record Ready for the desired channel on off by using the corresponding ON button 01X Owners Manual 17 Reference Getting Started Basics Section Before Using Appendix LZ wo a i 17 c a 2 L 93u819J3y paues Bua uoi2ag soiseg xipuaddy 18 Controls and Connectors III 00000000 NE dun v do ELLA gt ease ololo olo REEL
136. a mLAN Installation Guide mLAN Con nection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual s the master device operating in a stable way san effect such as HQ Pitch or Dual Pitch selected ee mts page 102 E The layer of 17 24 mLANO9 16 cannot be used When the sampling rate is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz the layer of 17 24 mLAN can not be selected page 40 R Cannot edit with Studio Manager Has the STUDIO MANAGER ID peen set correctly aes ciet orans page 94 s Port 4 Studio Manager selected for Studio Manager data transmission reception R Studio Manager Owner s Manual PDF E The Remote Control or Automation features do not work s the correct DAW software selected in Remote Select ania page 87 Demo playback Remote Control Setup Installation Guide 01X Owner s Manual Are the mLAN settings correct Demo playback Remote Control Setup Installation Guide Are settings on the DAW correct radha page 87 Demo playback Remote Control Setup Installation Guide s Port 1 selected for mLAN MIDI transmission reception sod page 87 Demo playback Remote Control Setup Installation Guide E Cannot change the wordclock Set this with the mLAN Auto Connector or Graphic Patchbay when using mLAN ien Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Wordclock Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Is the mLAN Auto Wordclock AUTO W CL
137. a single selected channel sse SOLO MODE page 96 E Display e Toggling among the different display indications for the meter and parameter value displays SHIFT NAME VALUE page 46 e Determining the time the parameter value remains displayed when NAME VALUE is set to NAME PARAM DISP TIME page 95 e Determining whether the channel level is shown or not when a fader is moved sees FADER LEVEL DISP page 95 e Switching the display indication between channels parameters values and only values eee NAME VALUE page 17 e Switching between level meter display of the pre fader signal or post fader sese page 46 e Determining whether a confirmation prompt appears or not for store recall operations STORE RECALL CONFIRMATION page 95 B Input Assigning the input signals from MIC LINE INPUT DIGITAL STEREO IN terminals to the input channels on the mixer seene eee eee INPUT PATCH INI 8 page 88 Assigning the input signals from MIC LINE INPUT DIGITAL STEREO IN terminals and Effects 1 2 to the stereo input channels on the mixer INPUT PATCH ST1 2 page 89 Switching the phase setting of an input channel ssssssssseseseee esent nter tette tenentes PHASE page 99 01X Owners Manual 11 12 E Output e Outputting only the DAW s stereo output to Monitor Out or headphones sss sse MONITOR pages 37 96
138. ack up Moves the cursor indicating the current track down Cursor Vv ZOOM goes out Cursor lt ZOOM goes out Selects the previous block Cursor gt ZOOM goes out Selects the next block Cursor A V lt gt ZOOM lights Zooms in out in the active Track View and Piano Roll Window Dial Moves the song position See SCRUB below Appendix Determines how the Scrub function is applied when using the dial When this is set to on SCRUB Scrub moves according to the Grid position in the Track View window When set to off it lights goes out moves in measures PAN mode PAN lights Knobs 1 8 turning Edits the Pan on page 1 Knobs 1 8 turning Edits the Input level on page 2 SHIFT Knobs 1 8 pressing Resets the edited parameter to the default value CENTER 0 00 AUX SEND mode SEND Not available when the AUX BUS window is active lights Knobs 1 8 turning Edits the AUX Send Level SHIFT Knobs 1 8 pressing Resets the edited parameter to the default value 00 EFF SEND mode EFFECT Not available when the AUX BUS window is active lights Knobs 1 8 Edits the Effect Send Level SHIFT Knobs 1 8 Resets the edited parameter to the default value 00 No function REC RDY LOOP EDIT FLIP 01X Owners Manual 105 Remote Function List Bl LOGIC
139. aders control the AUX 3 4 Return level regardless of the currently selected page Bii SEND LEVEL L LEUEL Adjusts the Stereo input 2 level Adjusts the Stereo input 1 level Don t use knobs 7 or 8 here AUX SEND 3 or 4 you may get a howling noise These control the stereo AUX Send level and could set up an undesired feedback loop Mixing Tutorial 3 Press the SEND button several times if necessary to call up the AUX 3 display below SEHD LEUEL 4 Go back to the input channels press the MIXER LAYER 1 8 button MIXER LAYER Q auno INST MIDI BUS AUX OTHER O ui mLAN 17 24 MASTER 5 Adjust the send level for the desired channel with the corresponding channel knob While you re adjusting this listen to the change in the sound If you need to go back to steps 2 and 3 above and adjust the Return level to an appropriate value Remember that you can also select the other channels mLAN inputs 9 16 and 17 24 by pressing the appropriate button in the MIXER LAYER section For more about the mLAN inputs see page 28 a gt e For step 5 try pressing the FLIP button and using the faders to adjust the send levels instead of the knobs See page 19 NOTE D e If you have little experience in mixing and using effects you should keep in mind that the settings you make in each section above are interrelated especially the Mix Aux Return and
140. age 19 Make sure that the signal routing of the audio is not set to PRE FADER or PRE EQ in the direct out configuration ee page 91 E Faders move to the lowest Highest position on their own e Automation Automix may have been recorded page 15 E Meters move even though the faders are lowered The direct out setting may be PRE EQ or PRE FADER iiie page 91 The meter display may be set to PRE FADER page 46 Bi The channels selected by the ON button and SEL button are not correct s the proper layer selected 0 0 00 page 40 E Can t recall a channel library The settings that can be recalled from the channel library are limited to the library of the same category ssssssRR page 103 E Can t exchange MIDI program change data Has the port number been set correctly page 95 Has the SHIFT REMOTE FUNCTION parameter been set correctly page 87 Are the mLAN cables connected correctly An mLAN cable may be broken s the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving devices s the on off setting of program change reception transmission appropriate 0 page 94 Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices page 94 e sa scene assigned to the program change number being transmitted eiciia page 94 E Pairing was specified but the signal is monaural Is the odd numbere
141. ages 72 96 e Optimize the input levels page 46 This is a crucial operation so take time and care in getting these levels right Listen to each channel separately and use the GAIN knobs the top knobs on the console to opti mize the input signal level In general set the channel fader to around 0 dB and while singing into the micro phone or playing the instrument slowly bring up the GAIN knob so that the sound is loud but not distorting You can visually monitor this with the meters in the display of 01X and Studio Manager For details see page 9 and the Stu dio Manager PDF manual 01X Owners Manual 43 Before Using Basics Section 92 g Ll o5 L z Z c Reference Appendix Getting Started Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E zi 77 Ld x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy 44 e Clean up sounds Garbage in usually means garbage out So make sure your source sounds are as clean and noise free as possible Use quality cabling check microphone placement turn off the air conditioner or anything else causing hum patch in a noise gate or change the pickups in your guitar if neces sary e Apply EQ page 48 If you can t eliminate noise problems at the source you can use the EQ on the 01X at this stage to cut it or mini mize it The EQ library page 99 contains several preset programs for reducing hum hiss and noise If you re after a natural sound go bac
142. am change num SCENE ber 100 Scene Number These program change Scene number assignments can be stored to exter No 87 NO ASSIGN 00 99 nal devices such as a computer by using the included Studio Manager software When the same Scene is assigned to more than one program change num ber the lowest program change number takes precedence 8 INIT Initialize Initializes or resets the Scene Program Change assignments to their default Yes values 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name x Related Block R Explanation Prompt c settings pages diagram E wo 5 mLAN MIDI INFORMATION o 1 GENERAL 1 LOGIC E 1 CUBASE This page is for display only and the parameters cannot be changed here 1 SONAR This display shows the settings for each mLAN port The 01X features five No i independent MIDI ports and the assigned functions are shown here The set 1 DP DIGITAL PER tings made in Remote Select page 87 are mirrored here for Port 1 and the e FORMER settings made in SHIFT REMOTE function are mirrored here for Port 5 B Nn 2 2 MIDI A 1 Remote control of DAW software No 2 3 2 Direct mLAN connection to MIDI A terminal 3 MID B 3 Direct mLAN connection to MIDI B terminal No E i 4 STUDIO M 4 Data transfer with Studio Manager software No Studio Manager 5 SCENE CTR s
143. an save your original settings as a User preset see page 36 E Operation D Press SELECTED CHANNEL to call up the Single Channel display The button lights 2 Select the desired channel by pressing the correspond ing SEL button 3 Press the DYNAMICS button twice to call up the Dynamics Library 4 Select the desired preset with knob 1 For a full list of the available Dynamics Library pre sets see page 118 5 Press RECALL knob 5 then YES knob 8 to call up the selected preset For details on using Recall as well as Store and Clear in the same menu see page 100 Use the preset as is on the channel or change the set tings as desired Make sure to turn DYN Dynamics on with knob 1 otherwise you won t be able to hear any change in the sound 01X Owner s Manual Pairing channels This convenient function lets you link two adjacent chan nels as a stereo pair ideal for stereo sources such as a synthesizer rhythm machine or CD player This links the faders and most of the mix parameters for the channels including EQ Dynamics Group assignments and Effects Parameters not affected by pairing include Input Patch Pan and Phase CD Hold down the SEL button of one of the channels and simultaneously press the SEL button of the channel next to it Notice that this only works for logical odd even pairs For example channels 3 and 4 are a logical pair but 4 and 5 are not As a re
144. and or data may be cut off Make sure that you do not insert or unplug ant connec tions when using mLAN Is the number of audio channels appropriate The amount of audio channels that can be used simultaneously differs depending on the computer capacity and speed mm page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide mLAN Con nection Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Is the sampling rate wordclock appropriate A high sampling rate can be the cause of the noise depending on the computer capacity and speed eon page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Wordclock Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Make sure that the appropriate number of devices is connected to the computer Connection of too many devices may cause noise depending on the capacity of the computer Are there any noise producing devices such as those contain ing power inverters etc near the cables Move all cables away from any possible noise sources Is the mLAN cable damaged Cables that do not satisfy TEEE1394 standards may cause noise Make sure to use the included mLAN cable or any other high quality cable with the same thickness When using the mLAN driver make sure to turn off or disable any background applications for example virus scanning soft ware or auto backup routines Otherwise noise may result due to instability of the driver operation
145. ange the setting Enable the Remote mode and start up your sequencer CD Enable the Remote mode Press the REMOTE button The 01X is set to standby REMOTE MODE CCUBRSE NUEMDO gt For details on how to start up each DAW application for Remote Control see the separate Installation Guide 2 Start your sequencer program Once your sequencer is up and running and a song has been loaded the 01X reads the data of the song track names level pan settings etc and reconfigures the entire mixer accordingly This means that the faders may move into position and the track names up to six characters appear in the display Pan Fullki DrumLo Recording Playback Remote Control Working in the Project window In Cubase SX make sure the Project window is on top This is the main working area in the sequencer and shows all tracks from top to bottom You can call this up from the 01X by holding SHIFT and pressing TRACK F1 Notice that the names of the first eight tracks appear in the display Pan fan Left Risht Pager gI i Bass Percus Celle Fullki DrumLo If there are more than eight tracks in your song use the BANK lt gt Left Right buttons to call up and display the other tracks in banks of eight 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section 923 s N D x CS oS Reference Appendix 13 Recording Playback Remote Control Hulsp
146. aper with soy ink Yamaha Web Site English only http www yamahasynth com Yamaha Manual Library http www2 yamaha co jp manual english amp YAMAHA U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2003 Yamaha Corporation WB29310 408POCP15 2 03CO Printed in Japan
147. arallel 30 Rev gt Chorus Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev Flange Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev gt Flange Reverb and flanger in series E s 33 Rev Sympho Reverb and symphonic in parallel gt Modulation based Effects 34 Rev gt Sympho Reverb and symphonic in series es Ki Proset Name Description 35 Rev gt Pan Reverb and auto pan i senes ypes 36 Delay ER Delay and early reflections in parallel 13 Chorus Chorus 37 Delay gt ER Delay and early reflections in series 14 Flange Flanger 38 Delay Rev Delay and reverb in parallel Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer 39 Delay gt Rev Delay and reverb in series 15 Symphonic and more complex modulation than normal cho rus 40 Dist gt Delay Distortion and delay in series ml 16 Phaser 16 stage stereo phase shifter 17 Auto Pan Auto panner 18 Tremolo Tremolo 19 HQ Pitch Mono pitch shifter producing stable results Others 20 Dual Pitch Stereo pitch shifter 21 Rotary Rotary speaker simulation No M i Description 22 Ring Mod Ring modulator 41 Multi Filter 3 band parallel filter 24 dB octave 23a Moree ee 42 Stereo Reverb Stereo reverb 43 M Band Dyna 3 band dynamics processor 01X Owner s Manual 125 Parameter Lists E Effects Parameters EB REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE
148. art Up then start mLAN Manager ow When a message such as file cannot be found appears D when uninstalling S Try executing the installation once more then uninstall y again a E For Windows The mLAN Manager mLAN c3 icon in the task bar has disappeared S Select Start gt AII Programs Startup or mLAN a Tools gt mLAN Manager Installation Guide S S R Launching mLAN Graphic Patchbay or updating to the latest information takes a while D When you try to update the network information after connect e ing or disconnecting an mLAN device that does not support S S400 the system adjusts the mLAN transfer speed and requires more time to process your request However this will Eg not affect any subsequent operations Di If five or more mLAN devices including a computer have been connected to a network the total number of transmission channels of all devices will be limited You can connect up to 86 channels in Windows and up to 98 channels in a Macintosh system 23 c E 3 o e gt D 2 148 01X Owner s Manual Specifications E General Specifications Specifications Sampling Frequency TS Fee Double rate 88 2 kHz C10 96 96 KHz 16 Frequency 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 1 3dB MIC LINE IN to STEREO OUT 48 kHz Response 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 20 Hz 40 kHz 0 1 3dB
149. as well moving along with the song playback The following is a brief explanantion on how to use the 01X to record and play back volume automation on a spe cific track Except where indicated all control button ref erences are to the 01X panel What parameters can automate All automation parameters available for a track are directly controlla ble from the 01X In Cubase SX click the small button Show Hide Automation at the bottom left of the track to display the automa tion track s Then click on the arrow button next to the current parameter at top right to show available parameters Then click on More from the menu to display the Add Parameter list You can control any and all of these track parameters from the 01X 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix 11 Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 Ld x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy 18 Recording Playback Remote Control E Operation CD Select the desired channel track Press the appropriate SEL button or use the A v Up Down cursor buttons 2 Activate Read Write automation Press AUTO R W the button lights then press the ON button of the channel repeatedly if necessary until both R Read and W Write are on in Cubase SX Keep in mind that while the AUTO R W button is lit all channel ON buttons are
150. ation Guide e Selecting the IEEE 1394 card when multiple cards are installed sse mLAN Driver Setup Installation Guide pod ELS Too to Demo es E M Installation Guide Settings for Remote Control s O base NUSFOO ierra E E E tete ate qdutattanetemeritutie tera be page 66 SQ01 Logic SONAR Degital Performer oo ecececceccccsesesesesesesesesesesesessscssneseuaseceuaseseusnssasssssessseseusseseuseeseususceeseseetseeesnseeeensnecenseseenens Installation Guide FO CX LN I M M MM ENDE REMOTE SELECT page 87 e Switches between automatic manual setting of mLAN wordclock sese W CLK SELECT page 92 e Setting the sampling frequency frequency of the wordclock when mLAN is used sese Auto Connector Installation Guide E Accessory software and mLAN related settings e Determining the number of mLAN audio transmission reception channels sss Auto Connector Installation Guide Setting the sampling frequency frequency of the wordclock when mLAN is used sese Auto Connector Installation Guide Determining the speed at which settings are changed when new wordclock is received Auto Connector Setup mLAN Transition Speed Installation Guide Quits enables mLAN network in Windows tnter tentent Task bar gt mLAN icon gt OFF Installation Guide Determining the latency how quickly the data is processed Basic settings
151. ault 22 01X Owner s Manual 111 uoi2ag soiseg uisn 910199 ER TETETETT pauejs uyay xipuaddy Remote Function List E Digital Performer On the 01X set Remote Select page 87 in the Utility mode to DP Notes Button Function LED page 114 In all modes SHIFT PAN Calls up the Mode list display SHIFT NAME VALUE Turns the Meter indication on or off a Enters the mode for Multi Part Editor Remote operation Press REMOTE button to can SHIFT REMOTE cel theznode flashes 5 SEL in normal status Selects a channel lights goes out 2 SHIFT SEL in normal status Selects multiple channels lights goes out 2 flashes SEL SEL flashes Fader touch out page 15 goes out SEL AUTO EDIT lights Fader touch in page 15 flashes ON in normal status Turns each channel off or on mutes unmutes the signal lights goes out 2 ON SOLO lights Sets Solo for each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 ON REC RDY lights Sets the REC RDY of each channel to on or off lights goes out 2 AUTO EDIT Changes the function of the SEL button to the touch in function This button flashes ights during automation touch in 9 SOLO Changes the function of the ON button to the Solo function ights REC RDY Changes the function of the
152. bs 1 8 pressing Enters the PANNER Effect Edit mode Press the EDIT button to return to the PAN a Surround Audio Channel mode D SHIFT Knobs 1 8 pressing Resets the edited parameter to the default value center m FLIP Switches the functions of the Channel Knobs and the Faders lights 37 PAN in the PAN mode Turns the Meter on or off SndVal mode SEND or SHIFT PAN gt Knob 526 Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters B peri d Changes the Send number 11 2 Knobs 1 8 pressing Sets Mute to on or off S SHIFT Knobs 1 8 pressing esets the parameter value to the default 0 dB a FLIP Switches the functions of the Channel Knobs and the Faders lights 37 SEND in the SndVal mode Turns the Meter on or off SndOut mode SHIFT PAN gt Knobs g eu d e Changes the Send number 11 gt Knobs 1 8 turning Selects the bus for each Send of the track Knobs tee pressing Switches between Send PRE and POST 26 S except when selecting a bus Input mode SHIFT PAN gt Knob Knobs 1 8 turning Selects an input bus for a track Output mode SHIFT PAN gt Knob d Knobs 1 8 turning Selects an output bus for a track Effect mode SHIFT DYNAMICS or SHIFT PAN gt Knob aE 84 E Knobs 1 8 turning Selects a Plug in Effect for each track
153. buttons may be assigned different functions Refer to the owner s manual of your particular DAW for specific instructions and setups e Remote control is only possible when the version of your particular DAW application and operating system conforms to the system requirements For details refer to the separate Installation Guide e For information on the necessary setup for Remote Control refer to page 66 Cubase SX SL or the Demo Song Playback in the sepa rate Installation Guide other than Cubase SX SL mLAN Interface The mLAN interface of the 01X also lets you connect MIDI or audio devices that do not have mLAN connectors or capability The following conversion is possible mLAN MIDI signal to from MIDI signal 2 ports mLAN MIDI IN OUT Port 2 3 of mLAN connectors to from MIDI IN OUT A B jack mLAN audio signal to from analog audio signal mLAN audio signal to from digital audio signal Analog audio signal to from digital audio signal Overview of the 01X 01X Owners Manual Before Using e 99 N D 4 pz S Reference Getting Started Appendix 33 Hulsp 910190 SS D 2 5 D N D E 3203J89J8H pauejs fura xipuaddy 34 Application examples Application examples The 01X is one of the most versatile recording mixers available Its all in one fully digital operation makes it ideal for song writers producers project studios home recor
154. by channel FLIP Assigns the functions of the Channel Knobs to the Faders flashes FLIP FLIP Switches the functions of the Channel Knobs and the Faders lights EDIT Switches the current window ES LOOP Sets Loop to on or off lights goes out F1 F8 F1 F8 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F1 The same as F1 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F2 The same as F2 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F3 The same as F3 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F4 Closes the current window SHIFT F5 The same as F5 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F6 The same as F6 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F7 The same as F7 as defined in SONAR SHIFT F8 The same as F8 as defined in SONAR UNDO Executes the Undo operation SHIFT UNDO Executes the Redo operation SAVE Executes the Save operation WRITE Opens the window for entering the Marker to the current song position MARKER Turns the Marker on or off lt lt Reverse or Rewind When the Marker is turned on this operation moves the song posi 33 tion to the previous Marker SHIFT Moves the song position to the top of the song When the Marker is turned on this oper ation opens the window for entering the Marker 110 01X Owner s Manual Remote Function List Notes But
155. cc DISPLAY A v Z Cursor A v Changes the Effect Number 11 35 Knobs 1 8 pressing Turns the Effect Bypass on or off When the bus is turned on X is indicated above the u 19 Effect name EQ LOW EQ LOW MID X EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH Assigns the Parametric EQ to the corresponding track E Knobs 1 8 pressing co e EDIT when any track is selected Enters the Plug in Effect Edit mode Press EDIT again to exit from the Edit mode lights goes out 252 E DYNAMICS Effect Edit mode SHIFT PAN gt Knob EDIT 34 lights Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters DISPLAY A v n l Cursor A V Changes an Effect Number 11 Cursor lt gt Calls up the Effect of a different track SHIFT BANK lt gt Changes the parameters to be edited with the Knobs in order one by one BANK lt gt Changes the parameters to be edited with the Knobs in groups of eight FLIP Switches the functions of the Channel Knobs and the Faders lights 37 DYNAMICS Prefs mode SHIFT PAN gt Knob EDIT lights LvIMtr Turns the Meter indication on or off the same as SHIFT NAME VALUE v SrITES anes Determines whether the displayed tracks of the 01X and those of the mix Knobs d coo pressing ing board in Digital Performer are synchronized or not m FtSwtc Switches between the footswitch assignments PLAY REC or F5 F6 on computer keyboard No function WRITE F1 F8 SHIFT
156. computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without limitation all computer software styles files MIDI files WAVE data and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of per sonal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIB UTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument Most of the computer display examples in this owner s manual are taken from the English version OS software The name mLAN and its logo mam are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respec tive companies 01X Owners Manual 7 The 01X What it is and what it can do Powerful multi faceted digital mixer computer audio recording interface and control surface all in one The 01X is actually several full featured high end digital devices in one compact easy to use package It serves as a flex ible 28 channel maximum digital mixer for recording in home and project studios and even live applications It s also a 24 bit audio front end for your computer for high resolution record
157. connecting the 01X to your computer via mLAN as well as information on necessary system requirements refer to the separate Installation Guide 01X Owners Manual 23 Reference Getting Started Basics Section Before Using Appendix Setting Up uoiag soiseg Buisp 910199 3203J9J9H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 24 Power Supply Make sure that the 01X s STANDBY ON switch is set to the STANDBY off position CD Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA 300 2 Connect the PA 300 s DC plug to the 01X s DC IN ter minal on the rear panel 8 Connect the other end normal AC plug to the nearest electrical outlet Rear Panel e STANDBY DC IN ON To electrical outlet AC cable Rn e When unplugging the AC Adaptor disconnect it in reverse order from that above N WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA 300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the 01X and may even pose a serious shock hazard ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE 01X IS NOT IN USE CAUTION Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the 01X for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet os chem RE
158. cs effect The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page 95 5 RECALL Yes 54 Before Using Dynamics settings are stored to internal memory in the Dynamics Library Up to 88 Dynamics settings can be stored The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Store Confirmation on page 95 6 STORE N CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the Store destination will be lost when executing the Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 Basics Section 7 CLEAR This deletes the selected EQ Library Yes GROUP INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL GROUP FADER GROUP FD GRP PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v Input Channel or Output Channel faders the level controls can be grouped There are four A through D Channel fader groups When channel faders are grouped operating one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders while maintaining the relative level differences Getting Started 0 GRP A B C D f you add one channel from a pair to a group the pair partner is automat No QU ically added to the group You can also select a channel on another Layer by switching Layers e You can temporarily disable a Fader group in order to make adjustments to individual faders by operating the fader while holding down its SE
159. ction E 923 Nn D CS d gt Reference Appendix usn 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o wo zt K N pa o P wo 39U313 34 xipuaddy Recording Playback Remote Control 3 From the Devices menu select VST Outputs 4 Activate all the outputs buses you intend to use Click on the power button to activate a desired bus Bus 1 is on by default and doesn t have such a button Up to nine buses can be activated In these instruc tions we ll use the simplest routing system only using Bus 1 so leave all the other buses off For instructions on how to use multiple buses and multiple mLAN channels see the box below CYST Outputs From the Devices menu select Mixer Make sure all audio tracks are set to Bus 1 This does not apply to MIDI tracks First make sure the tracks are set to full width Click on the leftmost down arrow and select Wide from the pop up menu Click here Normal v Expanded Narrow Inserts EQs EQ Sends Sends yx TE TE i E te E E Ls m v Disk v Groups BOB ET a xi El IRI DH c DHE S m pel Sl4 If any track is not set to Bus 1 click the Bus box at the bottom of the channel strip and select Bus 1 from the pop up menu 70 01X Owner s Manual 7 Click the Show Master button shown below to display the stereo master output channel strip 1 8 T
160. ction name Related Block R Explanation Prompt c fe settings pages diagram S c 3 REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP c z Determines the amount of time that the 01X waits for fader movement e before turning off automation recording This can be set over a range of 100 ms 5000 ms in 100 ms units When a fader has not been moved for more FADER TOUCH than the time set here the 01X stops writing automation data This is also D TIMEOUT referred to as touch out see page 15 The SEL button flashes while auto No 15 E 100 msec oo mation writing is active touch in When this parameter is set to OO infin 2 ity there is no time out and writing continues indefinitely You can BA manually stop automation writing by pressing the SEL button when it is e flashing page 17 S PATCH UTILITY Channel knob 2 1 INPUT PATCH IN1 4 Input Channels 1 4 PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V zm 2 INPUT PATCH IN5 8 Input Channels 5 8 Determines the input signal routing for input channels 1 8 This allows you co to route a specific hardware source MIC LINE INPUTS 1 8 or DIGITAL E STEREO IN L R to a desired channel input Turning the knob immediately e changes the routing The settings ADI ADS correspond to MIC LINE INPUTS 1 8 while DIN L and DIN R correspond to the DIGITAL No STEREO IN signals To disable input for the desired channel select NONE As the default setting MIC LINE
161. cts to the audio and you can also route it to the digital output page 91 so that it stays in pristine digital form even after leav ing the 01X To do this you ll need to connect the source and route it to the desired channel inputs To digitally connect the 01X to external devices you must specify the wordclock source for the system For details see pages 23 and 92 As you ll see below the hardware inputs 1 8 are assigned to the same numbered channel inputs by default Nor mally you won t need to change these However here we ll set the digital stereo input to feed input channels 3 and 4 Mixing Tutorial E Operation CD Connect the digital source to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack on the rear panel The digital connectors on the 01X are S PDIF make sure the source you are connecting is the same 2 Call up the Utility mode by pressing the UTILITY button 3 Press knob 2 to call up the Patch parameters 4 Select page 1 or 2 with the DISPLAY A v T Up Down buttons Page 1 contains Input Patch settings for channel inputs 1 4 while page 2 contains inputs 5 8 UTILITY INPUT PATCH CINi 4 1 8 CADI 12 INI Abe 7 Z TABS IHD4 19IHM4 Hardware Channel input input Page number current page is 1 of 8 total 5 Use the odd numbered knobs to change the input rout ing for the corresponding channels If you want to have the digital stereo signal routed to channels 3 and 4 select page 1 and use knob 5
162. d channel panned far left and the even numbered channel panned far right pages 99 102 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 145 uoi2ag soiseg Buisp 910199 3208J89J8H pauejs fura xipuaddy 146 Troubleshooting Bi Pairing was specified but the signal phase does not match Even when channels are paired the phase setting is not linked sssse page 102 R Automation Automix cannot be stopped Has the REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP parameter been set to correctly cvez esec rets Sty page 88 Bl Can t use the internal effects Effect BYPASS may be turned ON page 102 Are the level of STEREO IN 1 2 faders raised page 99 EFFECT PATCH may be set to insertion each channel page 102 tis not possible to insert one effect into multiple channels sse page 102 019 HQ Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 1 When the sampling rate is 96kHz 88 2kH only Effect 1 can be used B Can t use SOLO The channel may be set to Solo Safe page 96 E Fader groups and mute groups don t work In the Fader Group page and Mute Group page check that grouping is set to ENABLE page 101 E The pitch is wrong Is the 01X operating on the same sampling frequency as the synchronized external device adds page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device vi
163. ding and virtually all post production applications Here are some of the ways you can set up and use the 01X in your own system 1 Recording mixer and monitor mixer In this application example vocals and instruments can be recorded to computer while monitoring playback of MIDI tone generators with the 01X Computer Soft EQ Soft Effect 01X EQ Dynam ics E Monitor Out Here the sequencer data drives the MIDI instruments which come in stereo via two input channels and are pro cessed with Dynamics EQ and effects as needed The sig nal is then routed to the MONITOR OUT bus for monitoring Vocals guitar and keyboard are input to the other channels and are sent after Dynamics and EQ pro cessing directly to the computer This setup lets you record instruments in real time to exist ing sequence data while hearing the previously recorded MIDI tracks Any audio tracks and plug in synthesizers etc can also be monitored Remote control features Control your computer s audio MIDI sequencer from the 01X while tracking alternately switching between INTERNAL and REMOTE as needed The 01X also gives you control over the audio mixer in the sequencer includ ing the plug in instruments as well as detailed parameter control over the plug in effects 01X Owner s Manual Recording mixer features Naturally the 01X gives you simultaneous eight channel input with full mixing control
164. dio Mixer or moves the Audio Mixer Window to the front of the computer AUDIO P lights screen This button operation applies to the channel module 9 INST Starts the Audio Mixer or moves the Audio Mixer Window to the front of the computer lights screen This button operation applies to the Software Synthesizer module g MIDI Starts the MIDI Editor such as the Multi Part Editor or moves it to the front of the com lights 3 puter screen 9 BUS AUX Displays the AUX BUS window or brings it to the front of the computer screen when lights the Audio Mixer is active OTHER Starts the Audio Mixer or brings it to the front of the computer screen This operation lights 4 applies to the Effect module BANK lt gt Scrolls through the track indication every eight channels 104 01X Owner s Manual Remote Function List Notes Button Function LED page 114 e This cancels the Save operation when the final confirmation for Save appears SAVE E F8 SAVE flashes flashes 2 SHIFT F1 Brings the Track View window to the front of the computer screen This operation o g applies to the current song z SHIFT F2 Displays the Mixer window Audio Mixer Multi Part Editor or brings it to the front of ea the computer screen SHIFT F3 Displays the List window or brings it to the front of the computer screen SHIFT F4 Closes the current
165. dix uoi2ag saiseg Huisp 910199 3203J89J8H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 124 Parameter Lists Gate and Ducking dB dB 20 20 4 10 4 10 4 0 Threshold 10dB o K S 97 5 10 Threshold 2 20dB 2 Pa 2 20 S 20 E 3 5 2 30 7 Range 30dB a 30 B 5 9 40 O 49 naig 504 60 60 Range 30dB Range 70dB 50 E 70 4 ja NM TTT rr r gt I gt 8 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 E T T H T HE 0 T EE Input Level Input Level A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example level of background music is automatically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly Gate GAT and Ducking DUK parameters Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards Threshold THRESH sets the level at which the gate closes cutting off the signal Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close For duckin
166. dulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR d Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform 1 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R 134 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY ER 0 100 Delay and early reflections balance 0 all delay 100 all early reflections TYPE ee B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections DELAY gt ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 10
167. e DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance 136 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists ST REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb 2 Parameter Range Description 3 REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time g REVTYPE Hall Room Stage Plate R
168. e and Ducking 5 2 onere eee 124 HOME Basics Section l Initialize Factory Set Basics Section ss 42 Input and Output Patching s posti tenter 61 Input channel Basics Section eese 28 Input patch Basics Section 4 ioanee riore rin 27 INPUT PATCH IN1 4 Input Channels 1 4 88 INPUT PATCH IN5 8 Input Channels 5 8 88 INPUT PATCH ST1 2 Input Channel Stereo 1 2 89 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY ii n aa eic RS 89 INTERNAL Button 4 dec 3 rotundo Nt 18 Internal Effects onion Utm NERO INR 56 Internal effects 1 2 Basics Section sioiias asigi 3l INTERNAL MODE ftia aine OA 85 J Jitter OU X Terminology caeteri ttr 14 K KEY IN Gate and Ducking retener teintes 124 Knee Compressor Knee BXpatidet c 2 6 dite oae rte essa hice pes S 01X Owner s Manual L LAST SOLO etti aUi E IET 96 eim cavers ec M E E 15 Layer selection Channel selection Basics Section 40 LEVEL chanel 32 5 1f hime ee veter rr REP igne 99 ADFAEY 3caeniteta iet E cad deseo ed 54 Library 01X Terminology ertet 14 Library Structure Basics Section sss 36 LOGIC Remote Function Last eerte tnnnenes 106 EOGOP DULOT tt ipee eoe rtr o de Peek eth E cip nen 19 TOG connection srake E E B ae 147 M MARKBER b ltton i nr preti e
169. e as well Keep in mind this all happens digitally over the high speed IEEE 1394 Firewire i Link connec tion letting you directly feed digital audio to an mLAN equipped device For more information about mLAN and related applications see page 22 and the separate Installa tion Guide Bl Operation D Make sure your computer mLAN device is properly connected to the 01X and configured for operation For details on using mLAN see page 66 and the sepa rate Installation Guide 2 Call up the Utility mode by pressing the UTILITY button 3 Press knob 2 to call up the Patch parameters 4 Select page 5 with the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons Page 5 contains four Output Patch sources Stereo Bus Recording Bus Aux Bus 1 2 and Aux Bus 3 4 Aux Bus 3 4 Aux Bus 1 2 mLAN destination pair 5 Use the even numbered knobs to change the mLAN output channel pair for each audio bus For example to send the Aux 1 2 signals to mLAN channels 9 and 10 turn knob 6 until 9 10 is selected for the Aux 1 2 settting If desired save this setting also to the Output Patch Library for future recall See page 91 Mixing Tutorial Storing your custom patch setups Once you create a Patch setup you ll probably want to save it for future use That s what the Input and Output Patch Libraries are for They let you store your custom Input and Output settings so that the next time you have a same or s
170. e channels are linked the message PAIRED appears Pairs can also be assigned by simultaneously holding down the SEL button of one channel bus and pressing the SEL button of the adjacent channel bus odd even numbers After selecting the desired channel bus you can copy and link parameter values for the odd channels to the even channels by using channel knobs 1 2 To copy and link parameter val ues for the even channels to the odd channels use channel knobs 3 4 Use channel knobs 5 6 to assign the two selected channels as a pair and reset both to their initial default values The ST IN channels 1 2 cannot be assigned to a pair with any other channel f you add one channel from a pair to a group the pair partner is automat ically added to the group The linked parameters are as follows Attenuator EQ Dynamics Channel on off Level Groups Solo Safe Recall Safe Solo Aux Send on off Aux Send Pre Post Aux Send level Yes payers fura EFFECT INTERNAL EFFECT EFFECT1 EFFECT EFFECT2 EFFECT EFFECT1 EFFECT1 2 PATCH BYPASS MIX TYPE Effect 2 is 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V ERITETETE T AUX3 4 CH1 8 mL1 16 3 mL9 16 are 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only BUS STEREO xipuaddy Determines the signals to be fed to the effects processors If you select AUX 3 4 and select STI stereo in channel 1 2 for the output destination and if FX1
171. e instrument or an outlet always hold itself and not the cord Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold sunlight near a heater or in a car panel disfiguration or damage to When remo the plug Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument or during electrical storms Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple connector overheat or heat such as in direc prevent the possibility o components Do not use the instrume radio may generate no nt Do not place the instrum accidentally fall over Before Do not place objects in f Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause ing in the outlet du he ing the day to internal in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Otherwise the ins ise rument TV or en ron in an unstable position where it might moving the instrument remove all connected adaptor and other cables t of the instrument s air vent since this may prevent adequate ventilatio he instrument overheating n of the internal components and possibly result in Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of a
172. e mLAN auto wordclock setting is invalid page 92 NOT DEFINED Not available for this channel RELEASE PAIR This prompt asks if you want to release the pair setting page 102 SYSTEM BACKUP OK This prompt asks if you want to execute System Backup page 86 UNLOCK NO SIGNAL NOW This cannot be selected as the wordclock source page 92 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 143 uoi2ag saiseg Huisp 910199 3203J89J8H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Troubleshooting Troubleshooting No sound Wrong sound When a problem like this occurs please check the following points before assuming that the product is faulty In many cases you ll find the solution to your problem here If the problem persists then contact your Yamaha dealer or service center E No sound or sound is too faint Are speakers or headphones connected correctly page 23 s your amp and other external devices turned on Is the signal from the external device being input page 46 The connection cable from the external device may be broken Is the MONITOR A B switch setting appropriate page 96 s the sound level balance of MONITOR appropriate oisein page 16 Is the level setting of MONITOR PHONES knob appropriate s aten a eroa Raha E TN Ee Zare dodana cha page 17 The GAIN may be set to an extremely low value
173. e the mLAN settings E Cannot uninstall remove mLAN Applica tions for YAMAHA mLAN driver or mLAN Tools 2 0 For Windows Is the mLAN WDM driver selected as the default audio device for the system Select Start Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices Voice Make sure that something other than mLAN Audio 01 is selected for the Voice playback and Voice recording settings Select Start Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices Audio Make sure that something other than mLAN Audio 01 is selected for the Sound playback and Sound record ing settings In MIDI music playback select any option other than the range of options from mLAN MIDI Out through mLAN MIDI Out 8 e For Windows Select Start Control Panel Sounds and Audio Devices Sounds And select No sounds in the Sound scheme then execute again e For Windows If you cannot quit mLAN by selecting OFF after right clicking the mLAN icon in the task bar end the processes listed below manually Ctrl Alt Delete gt Processes gt select process End process When finished start mLAN Manager to change the mLAN settings again mLANVDevice exe mLANTFamily exe mLANSoftPH exe e mLANManager exe 01X Owners Manual 147 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix Troubleshooting To change mLAN settings select Start All Programs St
174. e width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping This functions as a limiter when the input level exceeds 0 dB Parameter Lists Release determines how soon the expander returns to its nor mal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold Out Gain GAIN sets the expander s output signal level Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the compander returns to its nor mal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold Out Gain GAIN sets the compander s output signal level Since the gain or level of the sound increases depending on the Threshold and Ratio settings use this to adjust the overall sound output Width is used to determine the distance in decibels between the expander and the compressor With a width of 90 dB the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor limiter With a smaller width 30 dB and a high threshold 0 dB the compander is an expander compressor limiter 01X Owners Manual 123 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appen
175. eceret tete ito ert ERE Dee 96 EQ LOWSMID secrete tute inercia eret eerie Eee 97 EO Parameters Values erectam y PREE 116 fS 25 T TT 122 External Gh ects 2 2 peret the eret eR ENE Ra eek 60 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 151 uoi2ag soiseg Buisp 910199 3203J89J8H pauejs uyay xipuaddy 152 Index F F1 F8 Function 1 8 buttons esse sese seene 19 Factory Set Restore Factory Defaults Basics Section 42 FADER GROUP retenir teh ONA 101 Fader Groups esr itm one De e ORO sasnzssansaasaceagsey coasted 64 FADER LEVEL DISP x rna endete 95 Fader Level Display 2 22 oret rb castes rad obra EAE 95 FADER TOUCH TIMBOU Dw 1 ten rem EON 88 Pinal Masten iin codes cra eer ete e ORO RE ERE canes ccs 9 FELIP ttm senean eerte Era dre eme E 19 FOOT SWITCH jacks 1 2 epica o eese etn 22 Forward Ph DUTON 2 eio ri erit ec hr E EREE 20 Function D TTONS os conn ren teret E oae e vi PO RS 82 Function E ise on te n er eet m eso t o i PO tates 84 Function TI66 ce conti reti aene E e re CO PORE ENS 84 G GAIN Compan der omsit aragorn ani EERENS 123 GAIN COIIDIGSSOE 1 certe riter reien trente aE EEANN SEE 122 GAIN Expandet 2 5 ree teet i e Rey 123 Gaim Enid Eti UR iei eds 16 Gale ones e eure i Drs enit es E on Gaye ae edes 124 GENERAL REMOTE 5 5 8 nnt peor D E ERU 87 GROUPS a E E dienen 64 101 GROUP DUON 5 eet e t E E ERSS 19 H Hold Gat
176. ecording even after fader movement is stopped REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP SEL pages 15 17 88 Starting automation recording before fader is moved sss AUTO EDIT SEL pages 15 17 88 Setting the time that the 01X waits before turning off fader recording Can also be set to no time out or constant recording sese REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP page 88 e Remote control of the Multi Part Editor by using the SHIFT REMOTE buttons sss SHIFT REMOTE pages 37 87 e Switching between remote control and internal mixer operation sse Modes Mode List page 37 E Miscellaneous operations e Speeding up adjustment of numeric values when using the knobs sse SHIFT Channel knob page 17 e Switching exchanging the functions of the channel faders and knobs sse FLIP page 19 e Assigning the function of the channel knob to the fader as well SHIFT FLIP page 19 Assigning control of the fader operation and settings to odd even channel pairs setting one channel controls the other sse CH PAIR page 102 Assigning fader operations in groups eerie e ec peer AEE b eee dee qb antennas se Mage sea A eine bep FADER GROUP page 101 s Assigning ON b ttor Operations in groups eure rte nein ertet rep ete ete Aa aa Pneterea eni MUTE GROUP page 101 e Switching between soloing of multiple channels or
177. ed The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Store Confirmation on page 95 7 STORE N CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the Store destination will be lost when executing the Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 8 CLEAR This deletes the selected Channel Library Yes Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 103 uoi2ag soiseg Huisp 910199 ER TETETETT pauejs uyay xipuaddy Remote Function List For information on the Remote functions of the Multi Part Editor refer to the Multi Part Editor owner s manual PDF file If necessary set the display language for the DAW software to English especially if letters are not displayed correctly Refer to the owner s manual of your particular DAW for details Remote Function List e For information and instructions on setting up the 01X for remote control refer to the Getting Started and the section Demo Song Playback Remote Control Setup in the separate Installation Guide booklet Depending on the specifications of the particular DAW there may be a time lag in transmitting control data and as a result the parameter value indications and LED indications on the 01X may not match the indications in the DAW If this happens refresh the display by operating a knob or the BANK buttons Dependi
178. ed page 94 The confirmation ce 5 RECALL prompt can be turned on off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page s 95 ce For saving 01X settings collectively as a Scene A Scene contains mixing set tings and internal effect parameter settings for all channels and is stored to internal memory in the Scene Library Up to 99 Scenes can be stored The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Store Confirma tion on page 95 NOTE e You can turn write protect on for specific important Scenes that you wish to keep from inadvertently overwriting or deleting See Protect on page 86 Reference N CAUTION e Any and all data in the destination Scene will be lost when executing Store Make sure to save and archive important data to computer using the Studio Manager program page 9 Appendix Parameters stored in a Scene All channel fader settings level Send level from each channel to Aux Outs 1 4 6 STORE Aux Outs 4 Level settings for Rec bus Yes 65 ON button settings for all channels Phase settings for all channels Attenuation settings for all channels Dynamics settings for all channels excepting Stereo In EQ settings for all channels Pan settings for all channels Bus Out settings for all channels Fader group and Mute group settings Pair settings for all channels Effect type and parameter settings for Effects 1 and 2 Library number of currently used
179. ed channel from the pop up menu 01X Owner s Manual Fle d Pat Aude MEX Soom Pod Ten Dew EES fik Pei Aude MEX Soom Pod Tuo Deren Also set the desired output bus If you are using the same output scheme as the simple one described on page 689 set this or keep it set to Bus 1 B For optimum ease in monitoring the input signal dur ing recording and playback set the Internal DAW Monitor balance on the 01X to equal 63 63 To do this simultaneously hold down the MONITOR A B and press knob 5 This sets the MONITOR A setting Then during recording and playback press the MONITOR A B button so that MONITOR A is active the lamp lights 6 Select the track to be recorded and record as usual from Cubase SX After recording play back the song track If you ve made the proper setting in step 5 above you should be able to hear the new track without having to change the Monitor setting for the track Select the Remote setting to match your sequencer D Make sure your computer is on and the mLAN driver is active Refer to the explanation in the separate Installation Guide 2 Press the UTILITY button 3 Press knob 1 to select the REMOTE SELECT page 4 Select the appropriate sequencer Since we ll be using Cubase SX throughout these examples press knob 3 CUBASE NUENDO If you are using another sequencer press the appropriate knob 5 Press knob 8 YES to actually ch
180. edback minus values for reverse phase feedback L gt R FBG 99 to 99 bs right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed R gt L FBG 99 to 99 bus to left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency CHORUS Two input two output chorus effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain FLANGE Two input two output flange effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSHF 21 2 H
181. en Q is set to HPF the No L SHELF gain control turns the filter on or off 96 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name Exolanatlon Prompt Related Block settings P P pages diagram D EQ ON OFF o Turns the EQ on or off The LOW band EQ functions as a high pass filter E 1 18 ON OFF when the Q parameter is set to HPF It functions as a shelving type EQ when No o ca U the Q parameter is set to L SHELF The L and R settings of the ST IN chan nel s EQ are linked together ATT Attenuate Selected Channel only E 2 96 0dB 12 0dB Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB No G S B EQ LIBRARY Selected Channel only 5 This can be called up by pressing the same EQ button twice in a row For example EQ LOW EQ LOW E See EQ High page 98 No EQ LOW MID INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL EQ LOW MID o EQ LOW MID GAIN EQLM G PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v E Nn D Adjusts the gain level Pressing the EQ LOW and EQ HIGH buttons 18 0dB 18 0dB simultaneously resets all band parameters gain frequency and Q for the No em selected channel c EQ LOW MID FREQUENCY EQML F 0 21 2Hz 20 0kHz Adjusts the frequency No c amp e EQ LOW Q EQL Q E cc Ec 10 0 0 10 Determines the bandwidth of the EQ
182. ermines the amount of time before compression is applied to the signal The smaller the value the faster the compression is applied Range 0 120 ms Release Determines the amount of time before the compression effect returns to normal unity gain Range 5 ms 42 3 sec Gain Determines the level of the compressed signal Since compression reduces the overall level use this to raise the level appropriately Range 0 0 18 0 Knee Determines how abruptly or smoothly compression is applied Keep in mind that this is related to yet different from Attack above The Hard hard knee setting abruptly while the settings 1 to 5 give smoother loga rithmic increases in processing soft knee resulting a more natural and less obvious compression Range Hard 1 5 For details on the Dynamics parameters including other Dynam ics types see pages 121 124 About Compression settings Keep in mind that all of these settings interact with one another This is another one of the reasons compres sion is widely misunderstood and misapplied Attack and Release are particularly interdependent Fast Attack settings allow you to compress transients and initial peaks in the sound Different Release times allow you to create sustain effects and make the tails of individual notes louder For example if you want the compressor to do its work and get out of the way quickly set both fast Attack and Release t
183. ers from which you can change and write settings See page 79 Just remember to select the desired parameter page BEFORE starting playback in step 3 above 6 As soon as you re finished recording and while the SEL button is flashing press the SEL button of the channel to stop Write automation of the fader If any previous automation data exists past this point it will be kept This lets you punch in and punch out fader moves or more accurately touch in and touch out and maintain the previous fader settings before and after the latest changes NOTE D About touch in and touch out Moving a fader during automation write automatically sends data touch in but stopping the fader at a point does not instantly stop the data write process touch out If you are using a mouse to move the faders the computer will recognize when you stop when the mouse button is released With the 01X controls the computer has no idea when you release the fader so you ll need to tell it when you want to stop by pressing the SEL button above Alternately you could just do nothing and after a certain amount of time the 01X will tell the computer to stop writing The Fader Touch Timeout parameter page 88 sets the amount of time of fader inaction before writing is stopped When the SEL button is flashing pressing the SEL button stops data writing before Timeout elapses 7 Stop playback Activate Read automa
184. es in your area for bat tery disposal information Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead batteries plastics etc If your dealer is unable to assist you please contact Yamaha directly NAME PLATE LOCATION The name plate is located on the rear of the product The model number serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number serial number and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 BP rear 01X Owner s Manual FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifi cations not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE Th
185. essing this jumps to the page of the Monitor menu page 96 No REMOTE UTILITY Channel knob 1 E 1 REMOTE SELECT PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v re 1 GENERAL Selects the Yamaha sequencer software SQO1 for remote control Yes 104 e c 2 LOGIC Selects the sequencer software Logic for remote control Yes 106 3 CUBASE Selects the sequencer software Cubase Nuendo for remote control Yes 108 4 SONAR Selects the sequencer software SONAR for remote control Yes 110 S D 5 DP Digital Performer Selects the sequencer software Digital Performer for remote control Yes 112 E 99 2 SHIFT REMOTE FUNCTION The 01X lets you maintain Remote Control over a selected sequencer over mLAN Port 1 yet still be able to switch to General Remote mode for control 21 13 GENERAL REMOTE ling Yamaha software such as the SQ01 and the Multi Part Editor over Yes mLAN MIDI Port 5 To switch to General Remote control hold down E SHIFT and press the REMOTE button the lamp flashes To return to nor E mal Remote Control press the REMOTE button again the lamp stays lit If you wish to enable selection of Scenes via program change messages see 4 15 NO ASSIGN Program Change Assign Table on page 94 use knob 4 or 5 in this page to Yes 94 turn the NO ASSIGN setting on To turn on GENERAL REMOTE use knob 2 or 3 01X Owners Manual 87 Function Tree Function List Fun
186. etc 92 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name x Related Block R Explanation Prompt c settings pages diagram E D DIO Digital In Out UTILITY gt Channel knob 4 gt o d 1 D IN ST BUS CASCADE Digital In Stereo Bus Cascade PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v cea 5 ON OFF Determines whether cascade connection to the stereo bus is enabled or not for No the external device connected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN terminal ATT Attenuate This control is used to attenuate Cascade Input signals No S i 5 SRC psatmplitig Fat Turns the sampling rate converter for DIGITAL STEREO IN on and off No e L converter n e 2 D OUT DITHER Digital Out Dither e CD When digital audio is transferred to lower resolution systems truncated bits may generate undesirable noise To cancel the audible effect of this noise a OFF small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs This 16bit process is called dithering On the 01X you can dither the Digital Stereo g 0 06 Out For example you can apply dithering to the 01X stereo mix data and No e 20bit e 24bit record to a 16 bit DAT recorder a Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of the 01X z The sound quality may be less than optimum if this is not set properly OSC Oscillator UTILITY gt Chan
187. etting For recalling Scenes via program change mes sages from an external device and for transmit 5 SCENE CTR ting Program Change messages from the 01X g 5 Scene Control GNRL RMT For remote control of Multi Part Editor software N c o 5 GNRL RMT e General Remote D PREFER Preference UTILITY Channel knob 7 e 1 STORE RECALL CONFIRMATION PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V 2 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT 4 ON OFF Determines whether a confirmation prompt is shown or not for the Store and No Recall operations When this is set to OFF the corresponding operation is S 8 ON OFF executed immediately without confirmation No eo o se This setting specifies whether SCMS Serial Copy Management System copy protect data will be enabled ON or not OFF for the digital signal output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack Even if this is set to ON it will be 8 ONOFF possible to digitally record onto a DAT MD recorder connected to the DIGI So TAL STEREO OUT jack but it will not be possible to make second genera tion digital copies S e 3 DISPLAY SETTINGS PARAM DISP TIME When Name Value page 17 is set to NAME this determines the amount Parameter Display of time the currently adjusted parameter value is shown in the display When No 38 Time Fader Level Display below is set to on this also determines the time the
188. evel No 00 40 0 is set to nominal OdB This works in unison with the channel fader on the panel 01X Owners Manual 99 Function Tree Function List Function name F Related Block R Explanation Prompt c L settings pages diagram c SEND INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL SEND c z SEND 1 4 AUX Send Level 1 4 PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V Determines the Aux Send level of the Input Channels When the channel knob is pressed the level is set to nominal 0dB S NOTE e To assign a pair simultaneously press and hold down the SEL button for one a AUX bus and press the SEL button of the adjacent AUX paired numbers S should be odd even and in order See page 102 Qe 6 0 N CAUTION No e When using an internal effect via the Aux Send do NOT turn up the send level to the corresponding AUX bus for the channel to which the effect return signal is routed Doing so will result in loud feedback and may Em damage your equipment For example when the 01X is in the default condition AUX 3 is routed to the input of internal effect 1 and the L R c signals of the ST IN channel 1 are routed to the output If you turn up the L send level of ST IN channel 1 to AUX 3 a feedback loop is created AX 1 4 PP AUX 1 4PREPOST AUX1 4 PRE POST Determines the Aux Send
189. everb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins ED HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density S E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections B HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency N LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 8 e ca M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band The meter function is for Studio Manager only Ex Parameter Range Description iid LOW GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB Low band level E MID GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB Mid band level e HI GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level PRESENCE 1010 10 For positive values the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased For negative values the opposite will occur When set to 0 all three bands are affected the same CMP THRE 24 0 to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold CMP RAT 1 1 to 20 1 Compressor ratio 2 CMP ATK 0 120 ms Compressor attack 5 CMP REL d Compressor release time o CMP KNEE 0 5 Compressor knee E LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency M H XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid
190. four of them To jump directly to the top page hold down PAGE SHIFT and press the DISPLAY Up button REU TIME This is the first parameter page for Reverb Hall Use knobs 1 3 5 and 7 to edit the four parameters here E No sound Edit away but keep in mind that you won t be able to hear any changes to your edits unless one or more of input channels are sent to the effect and you set the return levels properly see the section below For a list of the parame ters in each effect type see page 125 01X Owner s Manual 3 Return and send levels The final step is actually two fold 1 Set the amount of effect signal you want returned to the stereo mix 2 Adjust the amount of effect you want to apply to each channel Once you ve done that you may want to go back to the section above and tweak the effect settings or even select a different effect type We ll assume in these instructions that the SELECTED CHANNEL button isn t lit in other words you ll be viewing editing all channels at once E Operation CD Press the MASTER button in the MIXER LAYER section This selects the Master mixer for the stereo master output The faders may move to reflect the Master set tings MIXER LAYER AUDIO INST MIDI BUS AUX OTHER LJ Ld EJ uM 0 1 8 9 16 mLAN 17 24 MASTE 2 Raise faders 7 for Effect 1 and 8 for Effect 2 to around 0 dB When the Master mixer is active these f
191. g this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is ducked almost immediately With a slow attack time ducking fades the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt For ducking trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold Range controls the level to which the gate closes It can be used level to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely At a set ting of 70 dB the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold At a setting of 30 dB the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through At a setting of 0 dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden cutoff can sound odd For ducking this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through For ducking a setting of 70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff At a setting of 30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB Ata sett
192. ge the effects type on this page To change the effects type recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library see below No 102 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name Related Block R Explanation Prompt E settings pages diagram 1 7 EFFECT1 2 PARAMETER Effect 2 is 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V Determines the effect parameters Parameters depend on the Effect Types 1 4 Efect Parameters selected in the Library see the Effect Library List No 1 EFFECT1 2 LIBRARY PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V O 01 128 Determines the Library number Preset Effect numbers 01 43 see page No 125 Library number 125 are indicated by asterisks in the display and cannot be changed 1 14 Title Edit Determines the title name of the Effect Library No 41 For calling up the selected Effect Library The confirmation prompt can be 5 REGALE turned on off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page 95 wes 5 Effect settings are stored to internal memory in the Effect Library Up to 85 settings common to Library 1 and 2 can be stored The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Store Confirmation on page 95 6 STORE N CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the
193. gh a master level and are sent to the output patch sec tion The master level of AUX buses 1 through 4 can be con trolled by using the channel faders 3 through 6 when MASTER layer in the MIXER LAYER is seleced in Internal mode METER LEVEL AUX1 4 je AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 FX1 aux 4 FX2 ET E Getting Started page 62 Output patch Reference page 90 Output Patch is the section where output signals are assigned to mLAN channels 1 2 through 23 24 DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack and STEREO AUX OUT jack The following output signals can be selected Stereo bus The output signal of the stereo bus routed through the stereo output channel Rec bus AUX bus 1 2 AUX bus 3 4 STEREO 2 RECBUS 5 mLAN OUT 247 IEEE 1394 AUX1 2 Sa AUXS A DiRECTOUTI24 24 _ SELECT OUT PATCH STEREO DIGITAL STEREO OUT DITHER Q COAXIAL RECBUS SELECT OUT PATCH AUX1 2 AUX3 4 STEREO AUX OUT DA L P 10dBV DA Bese P 1 Wordclock 96kHz 88 2kHz 16 STEREO RECBUS AUX1 2 SELECT OUT PATCH mnm mi AUX3 4 nw n general these output signals can be assigned to any output jack or output channel For the STEREO OUT jacks and DIGITAL STEREO OUT jacks two adjacent odd numbered even numbered signals will always be assigned
194. he LOW EQ band as a second HIGH EQ or vice versa or even use all four bands on the high frequencies 01X Owner s Manual EQ Library The four band EQ gives you comprehensive control over the tonal quality of the sound yet unless you have a lot of mixing experience you may be unsure just how and when to use EQ This is where the EQ Library comes in handy It gives you forty different preset EQ settings for a variety of common recording applications These include specific instru ments even specific drums such as bass drum and snare as well as vocal applications and various guitar sounds Pick a preset that comes closest to your particular applica tion and see if it works If it needs tweaking change the settings until you get the sound you want you can then save your custom settings to one of the available memory space see pages 36 54 The 01X features a variety of Libraries Dynamics Scene Patch Channel and Effect containing custom settings for the mixer The operations selecting presets editing saving etc are the same for all the Libraries For details see page 54 Using Mute 0n Off Solo Mute and Solo are two simple yet important functions in monitoring your mixes When you have guitars vocals drums bass horns and keyboards coming into the mixer through eight sixteen or twenty four channels it s cru cial that you be able to isolate each signal and listen to it
195. he level of your amp speaker system to avoid damage to your speakers and ears INTERNAL N 23 gt Internal clock With this setting the 01X uses its own internal clock Press the appropriate S E knob below to enter the display for selecting the desired sampling frequency T 1 If you set this to INT96kHz 88 2kHz when the current layer is 17 24 mLAN layer 1 8 is automatically called up and channel 1 becomes the cur rently selected channel These settings are not available when wordclock is set to EXT mLAN 1 INT44 1kHz 3 INT48kHz 5 INT88 2kHz Determines the frequency of the wordclock sampling rate Yes 7 INT96kHz With this setting the 01X is used as the wordclock master page 23 by syn chronizing to the signal received via STEREO DIGITAL IN This setting is not available when wordclock is set to EXT mLAN The following indica EXT D IN tions may appear in the display 3 External clock Yes 23 digital in EXT D IN Can be used x EXT D IN System is unlocked no signal present Cannot be selected EXT D IN Cannot be synchronized because of some error phase differ ence etc This is for display purposes only and cannot be changed EXT mLAN This external mLAN is the currently selected wordclock 5 EXT mLAN source No 23 External clock mLAN m xEXT mLAN System is unlocked no signal present EXT mLAN Cannot be synchronized because of some error phase dif ference
196. he signals routed from the Input o D Channels to the Stereo Bus Pressing the SEL button of ST IN channels L63 CENTER R63 repeatedly toggles between the left and right channels for independent opera No T c f e tion You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels When the Stereo Out ST is selected it is used to set the balance 72 RECBUS REC bus assign PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V When this is set to on the corresponding input channel signal is sent to the ON No eu 3 Rec Bus ST BUS Stereo bus assign PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY Vv 5 When this is set to on the corresponding input channel signal is sent to the lt ON No eu Stereo Bus PHASE PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v Switch the corresponding Input Channel phase NORMAL indicates normal phase and REVERS indicates reversed phase You can set the phase sepa NORMALREVERS rately for ST IN channel L R or each channel in a channel pair Pressing the No e o SEL buttons repeatedly toggles between L and R ON OFF Selected Channel only Determines whether the channel is on or off The channel is muted with the D ON OFF Off setting This works in unison with the ON button on the panel No LEVEL Selected Channel only 96 46 0 Enables adjustment of the input level of the Input Channel signal and the out 6 1 8 BUS AUXIST put level of the Output Channel When the channel knob 8 is pressed the l
197. hts EQ HIGH lights INTERNAL gt EQ HIGH 98 PAN PAN lights PAN settings Yes INTERNAL PAN 99 DYNAMICS DYNAMICS lights DYNAMICS settings Yes INTERNAL gt DYNAMICS 100 SEND SEND lights AUX sends settings Yes INTERNAL gt SEND 100 GROUP GROUP lights GROUP settings Yes INTERNAL gt GROUP 101 EFFECT EFFECT lights EFFECT settings INTERNAL EFFECT G 102 LIBRARY SCENE SCENE lights Save store each Library data SCENE gt DISPLAY A H 85 INPUT PATCH UTILITY lights UTILITY gt Channel knob 2 gt 89 DISPLAY A V OUTPUT PATCH UTILITY lights UTILITY Channel knob 2 gt 91 DISPLAY A V EQ EQ LOW lights Yes INTERNAL gt 99 EQ LOW MID lights SELECTED SELECTED CHANNEL gt lig CHANNEL EQ DISPLAY v EQ HIGH MID only ights EQ HIGH lights DYNAMICS SELECTED INTERNAL gt 100 CHANNEL lights SELECTED CHANNEL gt DYNAMICS lights DYNAMICS gt DISPLAY v EFFECT EFFECT lights INTERNAL gt EFFECT gt 103 DISPLAY A v CHANNEL SELECTED SHIFT 103 CHANNEL flashes SELECTED CHANNEL 01X Owner s Manual Before Using E o 93 Ze a o A ED Reference Getting Started Appendix 37 Basic Operations Mode selection and display indications Buis 910199 A Remote Mode Ex SQ01 v2 R13 Rez Les R63 SteelG SteelG CleanG CleanG Di tGt DistGt REJ FAN PAN PAH
198. i Channel View Knobs 1 8 Edits the parameter Tweak the Knob to select Pan or Surround so that the Pan Sur EN 93 turning turning pressing round indication flashes then press the Knob to actually select either of them Knobs 1 8 pressing E 2 Parameters other than Mode selection Resets the edited parameter to the default value E EQ mode EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH Multi Channel View m EQ LOW gt EQ LOW EQ LOW MID gt EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID gt lights 10 28 EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH gt EQ HIGH Track Parameter View DISPLAY A v Cursor lt gt Changes the parameter to be edited Multi Channel View DISPLAY A v 3 Cursor lt gt Switches between EQ1 2 and EQ3 4 Z Track Parameter View e Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters Knobs 1 8 pressing l u when the edited parameter is Type Tuts ne EQ bypasson oit Knobs 1 8 pressing when the edited parameter is other than Resets the parameter value to its default Type SEND mode SEND Multi Channel View fants 11 28 SEND gt SEND Track Parameter View 9 DISPLAY A v Cursor lt gt Changes the parameter to be edited Multi Channel View DISPLAY A v Cursor lt gt Switches between SEND 1 2 and SEND 3 4 Track Parameter View For editing parameters When setting the Send destination turn the knob to select it on Knobs 1 8 Track Parameter V
199. iesen ecrire 118 Preset Dynamics Parameters Values sees 119 Preset EHeCtS DIDEALy 5onhun atate rendre a uens 125 Preset BO LAr ary oes conia diedretien dii ie drea 115 Preset EQ Parameters Values eeeternee termes 116 Index PROGRAM CHANGE piersici ete rre bee dne atn eee ee rere 94 Programm cli nge caeco so e teet e tr o do ee ere YER e read 87 PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE 94 Programming markers erre retenir REX ep 74 R Range Gate and Ducking asasi asas eee 124 Ratio Companider z 53 5 o8 rre hr HOS En ier tien 123 Ratio CompkeSSOE aoo oett eden ir dte EI bereue 122 Ratio Expander e erret ee P Rin erede 123 REC bus assigli 5 emere onere E Ere aie 99 REC bus L R 01X Terminology eee 14 REC RDY Record Ready button sss 17 RECAEE SABE tne EARN RES 86 RECBUS REC bus assign ccsscssssccsssecsesssesseseorsetereosasecs 99 Record 8 b tton en Sed Sete oi hele dss 20 IRGCORGIN GS uisi ee qon mem OC BERI EEn 66 Rel ase Compander eren ni ROO TEG IE I EYES 123 Rel ase Compressor 5 certi e ree HERE IRER ORE er cV iuo 122 Release Expander acie nee De EE 123 REMOTE 5 5 nonem EUG I e 87 REMOTE AUTOMATION SETUP 11 4 eer 88 REMOTE Dutton cci re ER i e Eh ER ERE ED E ED 18 Remote Control rre een tpa ea ro connie 66 Remote control Setup iae etn rtt tre the tne cire rr rt entr 66 Remote F nction Li
200. iew indication flashes then press the knob to actually enter the turning turning pressing p y selected setting Knobs 1 8 pressing when the edited parameter is Send Level Reset the parameter value to the default Knobs 1 8 pressing when the edited parameter is PRE POST Changes the setup or Mute PLUG IN mode SHIFT PLUG IN Multi Channel View fants 08 SHIFT PLUG IN gt SHIFT PLUG IN Track Parameter View 9 Knobs 1 8 Turn the knob to select the desired Plug in for insertion indication flashes then press N turning gt pressing the knob to actually enter the selected setting Knobs 1 8 pressing S s m Knob to which the Plug in is assigned Calls up the parameter page and displays the Editor window on Logic Knobs 1 8 turning 7 _ Parameter page For editing parameters 01X Owner s Manual 107 Remote Function List Button Function LED rum 4 I s Knobs T 8 pressing Reset the parameter value to the default Some parameters cannot be reset Parameter page e DISPLAY A V a Cursor lt gt Changes the page Page is displayed at the right of the LCD L Parameter page SHIFT PLUG IN Return to the PLUG IN mode from PLUG IN parameter pages INSTRUMENT mode SHIFT INST Multi Channel View lights 28 SHIFT INS T gt SHIFT IN
201. ifications eerie orate REED Red ben 149 Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference Appendix 01X Owner s Manual 153 uoi2ag soiseg Huisp 910199 97U91919U pauejs uyay xipuaddy 154 Index SQOUV Z res 9 SQ01 V2 Remote Function List esee 104 STANDBY ON SWIGh 2 critt ner rotten 22 ST BUS Stereo busassign acc eterne herr n ere ettet 99 Stereo DUS ASSIGN 1nd cre ceto eiie prd ie Or EORR Des 99 Stereo buses L R OLX Terminology ees 14 Stereo fader iere eo xe de ER ER ERE VE ERE EYE 17 Stereo input channels 1 2 Basics Section sese 29 STEREO AUX OUT Te o tror oom er RCRXU 21 Stop Bl button emeret tenent pe 20 STORE RECALL CONFIRMATION eene 95 St dio Mania ser o erepta get eH OE OG ORO Oda 9 STUDIO MANAGER TD sas 5 trii PREX n 94 Symbol Indications Basics Section sss 27 T Table of Contents 5 3 5 59 9 n mme cocti Ee n RED TT UTENTE 13 TerminoloBy cepa nen nee DEREN 14 The 01X What it is and what it can do sss 8 THRESH Compand6r 5 rere eene eterne 123 THRESH Compressor visi er ee reete eee ehe ence tre rater rnt 122 THRESH Expander 3 ir oett tert E ene ater eet 123 THRESH Gate and Ducking nme 124 Threshold Compander 0 creen 123 Threshold Compressor 4 reote tete tete 122 Threshold Expander
202. ighter try cutting the bass first This will not only emphasize the higher frequen cies overall it will give you a cleaner mix We recommend that you use the HPF on every sound source in your mix except for kick drum bass guitar and synth bass This will take out those bass frequencies you don t need to hear and give the ones you want to hear more sonic room and make them sound more crisp and punchy You might also want to do the opposite put LPF on bass sounds to cut out unnecessary highs Be care ful to use your ears though You may rob a great sounding bass of its character by doing this for example slap bass or standup acoustic bass Here s an engineering trick you may want to try If there is some sound in a recorded track that bothers you such as a buzz or a high pitched whistle like noise you may be able eliminate it with the careful use of EQ Set Q to a relatively narrow value 0 80 or less and boost the Gain at or near the maximum Then with the track playing slowly adjust the Fre quency value until the offending sound is heard loud and clear Now reduce the Gain until the noise dis appears and the track sounds the way you want it You can also use this trick especially with the mid frequencies to improve any instrument or vocal track that doesn t sound quite right but you re not sure why Remember that the frequency parameter for all of the EQ bands is FULLY adjustable This means you can use t
203. imes For a guitar solo sound that seems to sustain forever use a moderate Attack time with a long Release Note that if Release is too short you may get an unnatural pumping or breathing sound If it s too long the compressor may not return to normal in time to properly catch the next high level signal Since compression is a subtle effect it may take time to learn how to use it properly Make sure to play with the on off controls switching the compression in and out to hear how it changes the sound Listen especially for how the compressed and uncompressed sounds sit in the mix and use the effect judiciously to get the bal ance right 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix 53 Buis 910199 uoi2ag soiseg lt P D E zi 7 Ld X m B Qa 92u8J9J9H xipuaddy 94 Mixing Tutorial Dynamics Library Here is another handy feature of the 01X that puts the real world experience of professional engineers to work for you The Dynamics Library contains forty different dynamics processing presets for a variety of common recording applications such as compressing drums guitar and vocals It also includes some expansion presets for enhancing the dynamics of certain types of sound Select preset for your specific application or instrument and change the settings if needed Remember you c
204. imilar recording situation you can appropriately reconfigure the entire console with just a few button presses E Operation D Call up the Utility mode by pressing the UTILITY button 2 Press knob 2 to call up the Patch parameters 3 Use the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons to select the Library page The Input Patch Library is on Page 4 while the Output Patch Library is on Page 8 UTILITY INPUT PATCH LIBRARY o G88 Initial Data 1 4 Use knob 1 to select the desired Library preset number 5 Press STORE knob 6 followed by YES knob 8 to save the settings to the selected number 6 Name your new Library preset For details on naming see page 41 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix 63 usn 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 r x m B 2 92u8J9J9H xipuaddy 64 Mixing Tutorial Groups You can use the Group features to make mixdown chores easier For example if you assign all of your drum chan nels to the same Fader Group you can adjust the levels of all the drums together just by moving one of the faders What s more the relative balance of all channels is pre served even when fading out Channels can also be put in Mute Groups leting you instantly turn all assigned channels on off And remember that Fader Groups and Mute Groups are completely inde pendent a
205. in the display and cannot be changed Library number 00 is read only and contains the default settings for all parame ters By using Recall below to call up this Scene you can restore all 01X set No E o tings to their initial default state This Scene can also be called up via an external MIDI device by sending an appropriate program change message 00 99 b Library number according to the setting in Program Change Assign Table see page 94 Adjusts the gain level When Q is set to HPF this turns the filter on or off 18 0dB 18 0dB Pressing the EQ LOW and EQ HIGH buttons simultaneously resets all band Yes o9 parameters gain frequency and Q for the selected channel A These pages can be selected by using the DISPLAY v buttons Shows the pages such as the first in a particular parameter category that can be jumped to by holding down the PAGE SHIFT button and pressing DISPLAY A or v B Indicates the channel knob button to be used For circled numbers ex turn the knob to change the parameter For boxed numbers ex 1 press the knob to change the parameter In some cases both operations can be used The knob indicated in parentheses is used to change the parameter when the SELECTED CHANNEL lamp is lit C Display indication parameter ranges settings D Indicates whether a confirmation prompt is used or not If No is shown here the set
206. ine Manual Are all the level settings of any tone generators playback devices and the application itself appropriate e When wordclock is set to 96kHz 88 2kHz Make sure that input channels 17 24 mL9 mL16 or stereo input channel 2 are not used For Windows Is mLAN mLAN Driver set to ON From the taskbar right click on the mLAN Manager mLAN icon e Is the mLAN Audio setup appropriate Installation Guide Are the other settings of mLAN appropriate m The mLAN connection does not work below 144 01X Owner s Manual If there are more than four devices including a computer on the network the limit of the IEEE1394 BUS bandwidth may be exceeded The limit of the IEEE1394 BUS bandwidth may have been exceeded Check the current bandwidth using mLAN Graphic Patchbay and disconnect some devices if necessary Menu Bar Graphic Patchbay Online Manual If there is an mLAN device that supports only S200 on the mLAN network the IEEE1394 BUS bandwidth may be reduced and its limit exceeded Reduce the number of mLAN devices connected to the network or disconnect some devices as necessary Menu Bar mLAN Graphic Patchbay Online Manual E Sound is distorted Is the GAIN control set correctly pages 1 46 The connection cable from the external device may be broken The fader of the input channel or stereo input channel or stereo output channnel may be ra
207. ing SEL button 2 Press the PAN button 3 Press SELECTED CHANNEL to switch between the Single Channel and Multi Channel modes Which you select depends on your preferences or the application at hand The Selected Channel mode lets you see and edit all Pan parameters for the selected channel The Multi Channel mode on the other hand lets you see and edit one selected parameter for all channels CENTER CENTER LEF Mixing Tutorial a From the Selected Channel mode adjust the desired Pan parameter by turning the corresponding knob Stereo Bus See page 99 Pan position Phase See pages 21 99 Recording Bus See page 99 On Off This duplicates the ON button Turning pressing it switches Mute status of the channel including grouped channels Level This duplicates the channel fader Turning the knob changes the level of the channel and moves the fader including grouped channels The Recording Bus Stereo Bus and Phase parame ters do not concern us now in Panning If you re interested see the page references given 01X Owner s Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix Mixing Tutorial Buis 910199 uoi2ag soiseg o wo z E K o wo 25 93u319J3y xipuaddy 4 b From the Multi Channel mode press the PAN but ton repeatedly if necessary
208. ing and playback of your sequencer DAW tracks It gives you full transport and mixing control from the panel of most major sequencer DAW software and provides several bundled software tools including the virtual console Studio Manager and the Channel Module for getting the absolute most out of your computer connection Best of all it can perform all of these tasks simultaneously or at the flick of switch Let s take a closer look Recording mixdown console As a mixer for recording purposes the 01X is simple and compact yet comprehensive in its mixing power It has eight hardware inputs with two XLR connector mic line inputs and an alternate Hi Z input on channel 8 for guitar or bass With an mLAN inputs outputs you can have up to 24 input channels actually 28 including the stereo ins The fully digital 01X also features built in compression dynamics processing and EQ independent for all channels and two effects blocks What s more each processing section has its own set of Library presets letting you instantly call up the appropriate settings for your current application Highly portable the versatile 01X is also ideal for mobile recording applications even in multi channel full band setups With the mLAN connection and the audio interface features see below all you need is a laptop computer and the 01X and you ve got a full featured recording studio you can take on the road Audio MIDI interface for computer The 01X als
209. ing of 0 dB the duck has no effect NF 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists E Preset Effects Library Reverbs Guitar Effects 5 No dics oin Description No di ead Description E 1 Reverb Hall Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate 24 Distortion Distortion amp 2 Reverb Room Room reverberation simulation with gate 25 Amp Simulate Guitar amp simulation 3 Reverb Stage Reverb designed for vocals with gate 4 Reverb Plate Plate reverb simulation with gate 5 Early Ref Early reflections without the subsequent reverb S 6 Gate Reverb Gated early reflections Dynamic Effects B 7 Reverse Gate Gated reverse early reflections No Br a Description G 26 Dyna Filter Dynamically controlled filter ca 27 Dyna Flange Dynamically controlled flanger eo Delays 28 Dyna Phaser Dynamically controlled phase shifter Preset Name No Types Description L 8 Mono Delay Simple mono delay ED 9 Stereo Delay Simple stereo delay Combination Effects 10 Mod delay Simple repeat delay with modulation N Preset Name S 11 Delay LCR 3 tap left center right delay 9 Types Description 12 Echo Stereo delay with crossed left right feedback 29 Rev Chorus Reverb and chorus in p
210. input channels in stereo pair configuration for example 9 and 10 See page 102 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section 923 s p Nn D i s d gt Reference Appendix 71 Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag saiseg fer 1 zt K N pa o P wo 39U313 34 xipuaddy Recording Playback Remote Control Recording audio In this section you ll learn how to record an audio input signal from the 01X to the computer 1 Connect the instrument or microphone to the 01X and set the level s Make sure the 01X is set to Internal mode press the INTERNAL button so that it lights Also set the MONITOR A B switch to monitor the 01X sound In the default condition the button lamp should be off For details on setting up the 01X for recording see page 68 2 In Cubase SX enable the inputs you intend to use From the Devices menu select VST Inputs and click on the power buttons for the appropriate inputs Refer to the section Setting input levels and viewing the meters on page 46 for details on setting the input level to avoid distortion D Hel a 1 ia ia a la lata a a lae 3 Set up Cubase SX for recording an audio track Use an existing audio track in the song or create a new audio track if necessary 4 Enable the desired input for the track Click on the Input box at the top of the channel fader and select the desir
211. ion 10 00 12 00 2 00 etc Mixing Tutorial 2 Press the SCENE button to call up the Scene Library 3 Select the desired Scene number 01 99 Scene 00 is reserved for resetting the entire console to the default settings and cannot be overwritten NOTE D e If an asterisk is shown to the left of the Scene number write protect is enabled and the data cannot be stored to that number Select a different number or disable the write protect by pressing PROTECT knob 8 4 Press STORE knob 6 to store your settings to the selected Scene number 5 Name the Scene You can give a descriptive unique name to the Scene of up to sixteen characters in length For instructions on naming see page 41 caution When recalling Scenes keep in mind that volume levels may change suddenly as channels are turned on and faders moved Unless you know exactly what changes are coming it s best to turn down the MONITOR OUT control and any connected amplifier speaker system to avoid damage to your ears and your equipment 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix Recording Playback Remote Control Recording Playback Remote Control c 5 S You ve seen how the 01X is a full featured stand alone mixer and an exceptionally versatile front end mixer for u recording and mixdown with a computer system In this section
212. is product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these require ments provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the opera tion of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regula tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of inter ference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distrib ute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of
213. ised excessively page 99 The EQ attenuator may be set to an EXCESSIVE level ios tente E tenetis pages 97 98 The EQ gain may be excessively high pages 96 97 98 Is the wordclock setting correct for both the 01X and the exter nal device s aiii page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Wordclock Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use 00 0 0 ees page 102 Make sure audio data was recorded at an appropriate level E Noise is produced Is the latency setting of the mLAN Driver appropriate Changing settings after installation Installation Guide For Windows In the BIOS settings set Hyper Threading to off Is the wordclock setting correct for both the 01X and the external device s viat of page 92 Connecting a Computer to an mLAN device via mLAN Installation Guide Wordclock Settings Graphic Patchbay Online Manual Is an unsynchronized signal being input page 92 Is the dither setting appropriate sssss page 93 The oscillator may be functioning s page 93 If the speed of your computer s hard disk is slow problems may occur during recording and playback If you connect disconnect the LAN USB or the cables to the mini jacks terminals on the Macintosh you are using when using mLAN some noise may be caused
214. k to the last step it s always better to try to correct the sound source itself rather than correct ing with EQ You ll probably need to readjust the EQ when listening to all sounds in the mix anyway 6 Apply compression page 52 If your vocalist is alternately too loud and too soft or the bass fluctuates too wildly in level or the guitar doesn t have enough presence compression may be the answer The Dynamics library contains a wide variety of preset programs for correcting smoothing or enhancing the sound during recording or after 01X Owner s Manual Bi After Recording e Set up stereo pairs page 54 This links adjacent input channels 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc making it easy to unify level settings for both chan nels as well as EQ Dynamics and other settings except pan and phase e Pan the sounds page 55 Not only does panning allow you to create a more interest ing stereo sound field it lets you create more sonic space for each instrument in the mix There are no hard and fast guidelines here but generally pan to center the bass which is non directional anyway and the lead vocal Anything you ve tracked in stereo should obviously be panned hard left and right such as keyboards overhead mics on drums etc e Balance levels Now you re ready for the main task in mixdown setting levels for each channel and getting the optimum balance You may want to start with all faders at about 0 dB and wo
215. ker gt gt Hold to continuously fast forward SHIFT gt gt Moves the song position to the end of the song MARKER gt gt Moves the song position to the next Marker K m Press to stop recording or playback Pressing this when playback is stopped goes to the m song location at which the song playback started at last time gt Press to start playback lights 39 rej Press this to start song recording The gt Play and 8 Rec lamp are turned on dur lights ing recording ZOOM Cursor v lt gt Zoom FOOT SWITCH 1 USER A as defined in Cubase NUENDO FOOT SWITCH 2 USER B as defined in Cubase NUENDO SCRUB ENDO ony EE EE de PAN mode PAN MULTI CHANNEL only Knobs 1 8 For editing parameters FOOT SWITCH 2 USER B as defined in Cubase NUENDO EQ mode EQ LOW EQ LOW MID EQ HIGH MID EQ HIGH SELECTED CHANNEL only Knobs 1 8 For editing parameters SEND mode SEND SELECTED CHANNEL only Knobs 1 8 For editing parameters PLUG IN mode SHIFT PLUG IN SELECTED CHANNEL only Knob 1 on page 1 only Changes the Slot Number Knob 2 on page 1 only Turns the Effects on or off Knobs 3 5 on page 1 only Selects an Effect Type 17 30 Mee Beau Edits each of the parameters SEND EFFECT mode EFFECT MASTER EFFECT mode EFFECT gt EFFECT Global mode only Knob 1 on page 1 only Changes the Slot Number Knob 2 on page 1 only Turns the Effects on or off
216. l Controls and Connectors i Li PHONES MONITOR OUT I STEREO AUX EZ cem AUT o gt gt g G E n a UNBAL 10dBV UNBAL 10dBV 0109 0 0 MIDI B MIDI A ia met oan A STANDBY DC IN E OUT aR e e XC TOWER ADAPTOR Ll YAN ev e elo S S PHANTOM 48V RR rr 9T HA PA 300 Q MIC LINE INPUT MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 2 These are XLR 3 31 type balanced input jacks The nominal input level is 46 to 4 dB Mics direct boxes or line level devices with balanced output jacks can be connected here Each jack corresponds to ADland AD2 of the Input Patch settings pages 27 61 88 The pin configuration is shown below 1 ground Male XLR connector 3 cold Te 2 hot MIC LINE INPUT TRS phone jacks 3 through 8 BAL These are TRS phone type 1 4 input jacks bal anced The nominal input level is 46 to 4 dB Devices such as synthesizers or rhythm machines with unbalanced outputs can also be connected here Each jack corresponds to AD3 through AD8 of the Input Patch settings pages 27 61 88 The pin con figuration is shown below Tip hot 1 4 TRS phone plug FUR tole ee Sleeve ground Using Phase Reverse On some audio devices the hot and cold pin placement of the connector may be reversed compared to
217. l 1 1 1 uoi2ag soiseg usn 910199 3203J89J8H pauejs uyay xipuaddy Parameter Lists E Preset Dynamics Library violas or cellos 118 01X Owner s Manual No Preset Name Type Description No Preset Name Type Description Compressor for reducing the overall vol A variation on preset 20 intended for 1 Comp COMP ume level Use it on the stereo output 21 Strings3 COMP string instruments with a very low during mixdown or with paired Input or range such as cellos or contrabass Output Channels 22 BrassSection COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a 2 Expand EXPAND Expander template fast and strong attack 3 Compander H COMPAND H Hard kneed compressor template Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle sounds which 4 Compander S COMPAND S Soft kneed compressor template 23 Syn Pad COMP depending on the tones could diffuse such as synth pad Intended to prevent i i diffusion of the sound 5 A Dr BD COMP PE for use with acoustic bass Compressor for making sampled per 6 A D BD COMPAND u Hard kneed compander for use with 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S cussion sound like real acoustic percus S acoustic bass drum sion Compressor for use with acoustic snare i A variation on preset 24 intended for 7 A Dr SN COMP deme 25 Sampling BD COMP sam
218. lit This sometimes does not function in Cubase Error messages may appear depending on the MIDI related settings When the effect type to be assigned is changed you may have to change the slot numbers or you may have to return after moving temporarily to another page in order to display the page number correctly The editable parameters numbers differ depending on the assigned effect and the sound source of the software This may not function depending on the particular version of the DAW software The song position bar and playback position may sometimes not be syn chronized while the scrub function is being used 114 01X Owner s Manual 2 pid 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 3T 38 39 Depending on the effect type there are some effects whose parameters cannot be edited This is ignored for parameters whose default values are not set This is invalid in the Effect mode and Effect Edit mode The MIDI Edit window of the top TRACK in the Track View window opens This sometimes may not function properly The edited data does not appear in the 01X display The plug in effect must be selected Do not use any of the Remote Control functions while the DAW is exe cuting some operation or performing some calculation processing for example when a progress bar is being displayed etc This may result in the LEDs not being lit correctly Depending on the par
219. ll components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument Never insert or drop paper metallic or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard If th the power cord from th qualified Yamaha servi is happen ce person S turn off the power e AC outlet Then have the ins nel Do not place vinyl plastic or rubber objects on the in might discolor the panel or keyb Do not rest your weigh not use excessive force on the b t on or p oard mmediately and unplug rument inspected by strument since this ace heavy objects on the instrument and do uttons switches or connectors Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Saving and backing up your data e Any edited data see page 36 that is left un stored will be lost if you turn off the power to the instrument Save the data to the Library memory see pages 50 and 54 Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation Save important data to your computer Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to internal memory while a Please keep power on message
220. lue No Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 5 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 60 Attack ms 38 1 Comp COMP Out gain dB 0 0 11 A Dr OverTop COMPAND S Out gain dB 35 Knee 2 Width dB 54 Release ms 250 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 23 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 1 Attack ms 15 2 Expand EXPAND Out gain dB 35 12 E B Finger COMP Out gain dB 45 Knee 2 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Release ms 470 Threshold dB 10 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 3 5 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 Attack ms 6 3 Compander H COMPAND H Out gain dB 00 13 E B Slap COMP Out gain dB AD Width dB 6 Knee hard Release ms 250 Release ms 133 Threshold dB 8 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 4 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 25 Attack ms 9 4 Compander S COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 14 Syn Bass COMP Out gain dB 30 Width dB 24 Knee hard Release ms 180 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 24 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 3 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 9 Attack ms 17 5 A Dr BD COMP Out gain dB 55 15 Piano1 COMP Out gain dB 10 Knee 2 Knee hard Release ms 58 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 S Attack ms 7 6 A Dr BD COMPAND H Out gain dB 5 16 Piano2 COMP Out gain dB 60 Width dB 7 Knee 2 Release ms 192 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 17 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Ratio
221. ly as desired O zoom Vertical Zoom out Horizontal 7 Horizontal v Zoom in Vertical 2 Zoom can be used in the main Project view or in any of the editors Recording Playback Remote Control Working in the Mixer window Mixer control using the faders and knobs CD Hold down SHIFT and press the MIXER F2 but ton to call up the Mixer window SHIFT MIXER CF eM la B a BELDE 2 While the song is playing move one of the faders Notice that the corresponding channel fader in Cubase SX moves as well NOTE The response of the fader in the display is immediate but you might hear a delay between a fader move and the resulting change in sound For details on optimizing your system and min imizing latency refer to the documentation of your sequencer 8 Turn the knob on the channel to adjust the pan setting a gt Flip e Even though the knob is an intuitive natural control for adjusting pan you may want to use the fader instead To do this press the FLIP button the LED lights This flips the assignment of the faders and the knobs letting you control pan with the faders and volume with the knobs The Flip feature works in any param eter page that has both fader and knob controls 01X Owners Manual 15 Before Using Basics Section 923 s _ Nn D CS oS Reference Appendix Recording Playback Remote Contr
222. ly to the mon INT gt 126 0 lt DAW itor headphones output without processing The settings here let you set the output balance between the DAW audio and the audio of the 01X itself and let you switch between two of these assignments using the MONITOR button Monitor A the lamp lights or Monitor B the lamp is off These settings N 37 5 can also be made by holding the MONITOR button and turning the knob 5 o D for A or 7 for B E B LED OFF INT 0 126 lt DAW 100 DAW audio no audio from internal mixer 3 INT gt 0 126 lt DAW INT gt 126 O DAW 100 internal mixer audio no audio from DAW 7 INT gt 126 0 lt DAW Pressing the knob sets the balance to 5096 5096 To restore the default setting shown above simultaneously hold down SHIFT and press the corresponding knob PAGE INTERNAL gt SELECTED CHANNEL gt SEL EQ PAN SEND DYNAMICS GROUP EFFECT gt s EQ LOW INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL EQ LOW EQ LOW GAIN EQL G PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A V D Adjusts the gain level When Q is set to HPF this turns the filter on or off 18 0dB 18 0dB Pressing the EQ LOW and EQ HIGH buttons simultaneously resets all No band parameters gain frequency and Q for the selected channel EQ LOW FREQUENCY EQL F C 21 2Hz 20 0kHz Adjusts the frequency No EQ LOW Q EQL Q HPF 10 0 0 10 Determines the bandwidth of the EQ processing Wh
223. mLAN16 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only Master Layer az 5 c MIXER LAYER D Q AU CI CI 8 LU T J The currently selected layer determines the function of the channel strip SEL buttons ON buttons and faders Use the amp LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls The following table shows the layers that x you can access using the LAYER buttons and the parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer LAYER buttons Channel Strips Display Channels can be operated 1 8 lights 1 8 CH1 CH8 Input Channels 1 8 9 16 lights 1 8 mL1 mL8 Input Channels 9 16 mLAN1 mLAN8 17 24 lights 1 8 mL9 mL16 Input Channels 17 24 mLAN9 mLAN16 1 BUS REC Bus Out master MASTER lights 3 6 AUX1 4 AUX Bus 1 4 masters Stereo Inputs 1 2 Ge PURIS Stereo Input 2 is 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only The STEREO SEL button ON button and STEREO fader always control the Stereo Out signal regardless of the Layer settings 40 01X Owner s Manual Selected Channel mode To select a channel on the 01X press the corresponding SEL button The channel is selected and the SEL button lamp lights up Stereo Input Channel For stereo input channels you can set the left and right panpots individually Repearedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the left and right channels e L indicates the left channel pan settings of the ste
224. made in mLAN Driver tritt iret ire re reis mLAN Driver Setup Latency Installation Guide Settings made in relevant application ASIO mLAN Control Panel Preferred Buffer Size Installation Guide e Determining the audio driver ASIO WDM used with mAN esse mLAN Driver Setup Mode Installation Guide e Checking the reception condition of mLAN from 01X to computer mLAN Driver Setup gt Status Information Installation Guide Using the same 01X EQ and Dynamics effects from the computer using the computer s processing power 01X Channel Module 01X Channel Module Owner s Manual PDF E Frequent settings for Recording Playing back e Determining the number of mLAN audio transmission reception channels sse Auto Connector Installation Guide e Setting the sampling rate wordclock when using MLAN esse eee eee Auto Connector Installation Guide Determining the latency how quickly the data is processed Basic settings made InmLAN Driver ciant tret irent aty erza oerz vans mLAN Driver Setup Latency Installation Guide Settings made in relevant application ASIO mLAN Control Panel Preferred Buffer Size Installation Guide e Determining the audio driver ASIO WDM used with mAN esse mLAN Driver Setup Mode Installation Guide Monitoring outputting the DAW digital audio workstation sound from the 01X Outputting the sound
225. ming tracks There are two ways below to select a track remotely Notice that selecting a track also automatically arms enables it for recording Use the A v Up Down cursor buttons Press these to select the previous or next track in the Project window Note that the track is highlighted in Cubase SX and the corresponding channel SEL button on the 01X lights These buttons serve the same func tion as the up down keys on your computer keyboard e Press the SEL button of the appropriate track Use the BANK lt gt Left Right buttons if necessary to select the desired bank of eight tracks then press the appropriate SEL button Zoom The Zoom controls are another navigation convenience No longer do you have to mouse with the zoom sliders or the magnifying glass tool or use the Zoom submenu in the sequencer You ll soon appreciate how easy it is to navi gate through your song and change the views of your song data right from the 01X In the Project window for example you may want to zoom out vertically and see more tracks at a time Or you may want to zoom in horizontally and see more detail in a few number of measures Zooming in and out can also help you in the Sample Editor letting you examine details in the wave or seeing the entire picture as needed D To use Zoom simultaneously hold down the ZOOM button and press one of the cursor buttons to zoom in and out vertically or horizontal
226. ms 76 Attack ms 1 21 Strings3 COMP Out gain dB 25 31 Click Erase EXPAND Out gain dB 20 z Knee 2 Knee 2 Release ms 186 Release ms 284 Threshold dB 18 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 1 7 Ratio 1 2 5 S 22 BrassSection COMP Qu adn aj 32 Announcer COMPAND H A gt Knee 1 Width dB 18 2 Release ms 226 Release ms 180 m Threshold dB 13 Threshold dB 9 Si Ratio 1 2 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 58 T Attack ms 20 23 Syn Pad COMP Out gain dB 20 33 Limiter1 COMPAND S Out gain dB 80 Knee 1 Width dB 90 e Release ms 238 Release ms 3 915 E Threshold dB 18 Threshold dB 0 E Ratio 1 E Ratio 1 oo c Attack ms 8 Attack ms 0 T 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S Out gain dB 25 34 Limiter2 COMP Out gain dB 0 0 S Width dB 18 Knee hard Release ms 238 Release ms 319 Threshold dB 14 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 2 Ratio 1 3 5 3 25 Sampling BD COMP Qui aui eB 35 Total Comp1 COMP Qu calm aj lt T Knee 4 Knee hard QJ Release ms 35 Release ms 447 S Threshold dB 18 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 4 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 8 Attack ms 11 26 Sampling SN COMP Out gain dB 30 36 Total Comp2 COMP Out gain dB 6 0 Knee hard Knee 1 Release ms 354 Release ms 180 Z Threshold dB 23 Threshold dB 26 en Ratio 1 20 Range dB b56 2 g Attack ms 15 37 Gate GATE Attack ms 0 ae Hip Comp COMPAND S T Gut gain dB 0 0 Hold ms 2 56 Width
227. n Up to nine buses can be acti vated CYST Outputs 3 From the Devices menu select Mixer 4 Make the desired track bus assignments Click the Bus box at the bottom of the channel strip of the audio track and select the desired bus from the pop up menu INTLHINTR INTLHNTR INTLHNTR INTL INTLHNTR x en 5 Set the 01X to Internal operation by pressing the INTERNAL button the lamp lights Recording Playback Remote Control 6 Enable Monitor B Press the MONITOR A B button so that the lamp is off This enables monitoring of the individual mLAN out puts from the DAW computer It also enables you to independently mix and process the individual DAW audio tracks from the 01X Keep in mind that this monitor setting can be changed page 96 The instructions here apply when the default setting is used 7 Use the MIXER LAYER buttons on the 01X to select the appropriate mLAN output group Press the INST 9 16 mL1 8 button to select mLAN channels 9 16 and press MIDI 17 24 mL9 16 button to select mLAN channels 17 24 MIXER LAYER AUDIO INST MIDI BUS AUX OTHER C E ES E CJ 1 8 9 16 mLAN 17 24 MASTER 8 Use the appropriate faders to set the levels The mLAN outputs from the DAW computer are now routed to the input channels of the 01X channels 9 24 and can be processed and mixed along with channels 1 8 NOTE When inputting stereo signals use odd even
228. ncy S REV SYM 0 100 Reverb and symphonic balance 0 all reverb 100 all symphonic BA FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed a DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform S REV SYMPHO E One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series S Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time a INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density z HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency c LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency E REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb S FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Z REV gt PAN One input two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel 5 Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and panned reverb balance 0 all panned reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Mo
229. nd muddy or strident The moral of this story is EQ can be overdone so use it sparingly 01X Owner s Manual B Operation D Select the desired channel by pressing the correspond ing SEL button 2 Press the desired EQ button LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH This calls up the corresponding EQ parameters The four EQ bands are set by default to the following cen tral frequencies LOW 125 Hz LOW MID 1 0 kHz HIGH MID 4 0 kHz HIGH 10 0 kHz 3 Press SELECTED CHANNEL to switch between the Single Channel and Multi Channel modes Which you select depends on your preferences or the application at hand The Selected Channel mode lets you see and edit all EQ parameters for the selected channel SELECTED CHANNEL C EQ OH ATT OH The Multi Channel mode on the other hand lets you see and edit one selected parameter for all channels SELECTED CHANNEL CR zb For instructions on selecting the Display Modes refer to page 38 Mixing Tutorial 4 a From the Selected Channel mode adjust the desired EQ parameter by turning the corresponding knob 66 On Off Q bandwidth Gain Attenuation input signal level Frequency b From the Multi Channel mode press the same EQ button as in step 2 above repeatedly to select the desired parameter Adjust the parameter for each channel with the corre sponding knob iH MID GAI 4 1 ek Zid DISP
230. nel knob 5 1 OSCILLATOR PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v The 01X features an Oscillator you can use for sound check and testing pur poses This turns the Oscillator on or off Reference 5 ON OFF CAUTION No e To prevent any sudden tone bursts in your monitors or headphones set the LEVEL parameter to minimum 96dB before turning on the Oscilla tor 8 dcn Determines the Oscillator output level No e 96dB 0dB P Appendix Select the Oscillator waveforms SINE 100Hz SINE 1kHz SINE 10kHz or D WAVEFORM WHITE NOISE No e 2 OSC ASSIGN Oscillator Assign 1 RECBUS No 3 6 AUX1 4 Determines the transmission destination of the Oscillator The selected bus is No indicated in brackets for example lt RECBUS gt 8 ST BUS No 01X Owner s Manual 93 uoi2ag saiseg Huisp 910199 ERTIES EYE S pauejs fura xipuaddy 94 Function Tree Function List Function name settings Explanation Prompt Related pages MIDI UTILITY Channel knob 6 1 STUDIO MANAGER ID PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY v D 1 8 Determines the Studio Manager ID This number must match the Console No Device ID of the Studio Manager page 9 when transferring the data 2 MIDI CHANNEL Teen Determines the MIDI Transmit channel for transmitting MIDI program
231. nel strips for all 01X channels with faders pan controls and real time metering and lets you see all your Dynamics and EQ edits on the monitor e SQ01 V2 Windows only This is the latest version of Yamaha s powerful audio MIDI sequencer featuring a new Audio Mixer window The 001 V2 lets you easily record edit and play back your own songs on computer and provides a seamless environ ment for the included Plug in software as well as third party plug ins o TWE Wave Editor Windows only This audio editing software is comprehensive yet simple and easy to use giving you the tools to change enhance and transform your audio recordings Multi Part Editor for MOTIF RACK Windows only This convenient software allows you to edit the Mixing parameters including effects of the MOTIF RACK from your computer when using the MOTIF RACK as a multi timbral tone generator 01X Owners Manual g 10 Application Index This convenient easy to use index is divided into general categories to help you when you want to find informa tion on a specific topic or function For information on the electronic owner s manuals PDF refer to the sepa rate Installation Guide Bi Installation Normal Settings e Uninstall removing the installed application sse tnter tnter eter teen ettet eni tenens Installation Guide e Necessary Software Drivers Applications Installation essere nennen Install
232. ng noise to minimize effects of quantization noise sse D OUT DITHER page 93 E Program Change and MIDI e Enabling disabling remote control including Program Change over the Multi Part Editor SHIFT REMOTE FUNCTION page 87 e Setting the MIDI send receive channels for Program Change sse enne MIDI CHANNEL page 94 e Determining whether Program Change messages are transmitted received or not PROGRAM CHANGE page 94 Setting a specific Program Change number to be transmitted when a Scene is recalled serene PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE page 94 e Using incoming Program Change messages to change Scenes eee eee PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE page 94 Bi Others e Distinguishing among different 01X units when using Studio Manager sss STUDIO MANAGER ID page 94 e Enabling disabling SCMS Serial Copy Management System sse DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT page 95 e Using the oscillator signal and changing its waveform sese eenenrneeeneneeteeeneeneenens OSCILLATOR page 93 s Setting thie stereo pan ee eT csetera dated qutd tet qe etes te ttn det uie ted ereeis PAN page 99 e Adiustingrthiesend level cess eee oce p RO EORR REIR eau BOUM cab A EAE Ee AE AAEE E OEE ESEA URS RP REUR C PCR Eed SEND page 100 e Setting the transmission position pre post of the signal sent to AUX eee AUX 4 PREPOST
233. ng on the particular DAW refreshing the indications in this way may not be possible ll SQ01 V2 In the Track View window select Remote Control from the Setup menu and set the Mode to 01X On the 01X set Remote Select page 87 in the Utility mode to GENERAL Notes Button Function LED page 114 In all modes SHIFT INTERNAL Exits from Remote mode then starts Studio Manager 8 NAME VALUE Changes the indication of the parameter name and its value SHIFT NAME VALUE Changes the meter display mode DISPLAY A v Changes the parameter to be edited flashes SEL when SEL lamp flashes Fader touch out page 15 goes out SEL 2 Ped AUTO EDIT lamp is on Fader touch in page 15 flashes ON in normal status Turns each channel off or on mutes unmutes the signal lights goes out 58 This sets all channels to the same off on mute unmute status as the master channel m uL Master channel Pressing it again turns all channels on or off simultaneously Applies to the Channel lights goes out Module and Software Synthesizer Module This sets all channels excepting the master channel to the same off on mute unmute SHIFT ON of each channel status as the channel whose button was pressed Pressing it again turns all channels lidhts aoes out 4 in normal status excepting the master channel on or off simultaneously Applies to the
234. ng sections Before Using page 14 Use this section to find out about all of the buttons controls and connectors of the 01X It also explains how to set up the instrument and connect external equipment Basics Section page 25 This section provides an overview of the main functions and features of the 01X and introduces you to the basic operating conventions Getting Started page 43 This section explains how to use the basic functions of the 01X Reference page 84 This is the 01X encyclopedia It explains all functions and parameters including the Remote functions Appendix page 115 This section contains various important lists such as the EQ Library list Dynamics Library list Effect Parameter list and MIDI Implementation Chart This section also contains detailed information on the 01X such as MIDI Display Messages Troubleshooting and Specifi cations Installation Guide separate booklet Refer to this for instructions on installing the included software programs on the CD ROM to your computer This also contains necessary system requirements for the 01X and supplementary software mLAN setup Remote Control Setup as well as information how to play the demo song and computer software that can be controlled from the 01X Copying of commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files for any purpose other than your own per sonal use is strictly prohibited This product incorporates and bundles
235. not be affected by recalling a Scene Recall Safe sss RECALL SAFE page 86 E Entering data Entering characters Library name settlhigs oioirr tratto ertt Fewer ena Reb dn Fen cedides ibadi eiris dde Re Title Edit page 41 Resetting parameters Initializing Resetting the 01X to its default settings Factory Set n eecscssssessesecsssesecesesseseeessesesesscecsesessesesesusecaeseseeaeaesusecaeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeenees Factory Set page 42 Initializing Scene parameters reete tenter n ree e d rr n Scene Library recalling Library 00 page 85 e Initializing INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH parameters sse Input Output Patch Library recalling Library 00 pages 89 91 Initializing Channel parameters sse entente Channel Library recalling Library 00 or 01 page 103 E mLAN e Switches between automatic manual setting of MLAN wordclock sse W CLK SELECT page 92 e Setting the sampling rate wordclock When the OTX isthe master eon eee reta ette tob Ge oaa obtu oaa ceat eaae mLAN AUTO W CLK mLAN AUTO Wordclock page 92 s ANhenisingim N C s sce oe rec EE eer etie C be terea teen ete t me te Cete dede eee eeu ere tee pite dete Auto Connector Installation Guide E Remote Control e Selecting the DAW sequencer to be remotely controlled sese REMOTE SELECT page 87 Emulating touch sensitive fader control e Continuing automation r
236. ny channel can be assigned to either or both Fader Groups Channels assigned to the same fader Group can all be changed together simultaneously simply by adjusting the fader of one of the assigned channels Bl Operation CD Press the GROUP button repeatedly if necessary to call up the Group Enable display 32 MUTECE H3 E EHA F EHR G ENA H EHR I 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 ll 6 I 4 I 8 I 2 Make sure that the Groups you intend to assign are all enabled The four fader Groups are labeled A B C and D If necessary use the corresponding knobs 1 4 to set the desired Groups to ENA enable 3 Press the GROUP button again twice to call up the Fader Group display 4 Assign each channel to the desired Group A D by using the corresponding channel knob If the channel is one of a pair the setting will automati cally be made for both channels The Pair setting described on page 54 can also be set from the CHANNEL PAIR display in the Group pages here For details see page 102 01X Owner s Manual Mute Groups Channels assigned to the same Mute Group can all be turned on and off together simultaneously simply by pressing the ON button of one of the assigned channels E Operation D Press the GROUP button repeatedly if necessary to call up the Group Enable display 2 Make sure that the Groups you intend to assign are all enabled The four Mute Groups are labeled E
237. o functions as a sophisticated high quality audio front end for your computer Simply a connect a standard IEEE 1394 FireWire i Link cable for high speed data transfer and easy operation with IEEE 1394 capable mLAN compat ible computer This gives you high resolution 24 bit audio with the sampling rate switchable between 44 1 kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz Macintosh only and 96kHz The 01X is also a multi port MIDI interface for your computer with two sets of MIDI terminals on the rear panel The mLAN interface also handles MIDI giving you five independent MIDI ports page 95 Remote control surface for computer sequencers and digital audio workstations DAWs More than just a conventional mixer the 01X is also a convenient comprehensive control surface for your sequencer or DAW application It features tape recorder style transport controls window navigation buttons and allows you to use the faders knobs and channel buttons for mixing your sequencer tracks in real time Which means you have full automation control over your mix and can even change and automate EQ and effect settings for each track Most major DAW appli cations and MIDI audio sequencers are supported including Cubase SX SL Nuendo Logic SONAR and Digital Per former The 01X is a perfect hybrid of the analog and digital you get the benefits of clean digital sound yet you still have physi cal knobs sliders and switches to touch giving you hands on control You ll find the
238. o route signals to 01 X monitor input set MONITOR 17 18 in mLAN Auto Connector PC 01X to 2CH then set the master outputs from the DAW to Channels 17 and 18 as shown below v mLAN 01 mLAN 03 mLAN 05 mLAN 07 mLAN 09 mLAN 11 mLAN 13 Em LAN 19 mLAN 21 mLAN 23 mLAN 25 mLAN 27 mLAN 29 mLAN 31 mLAN UI e In this setup all tracks are set to Bus 1 the default and Bus 1 is routed to the mLAN master outputs NOTE Itis possible to monitor without decreasing the number of input channels faders by using the monitor input function of 01X direct monitor e When you are using WDM and ASIO simultaneously refer to Setting in the mLAN Auto Connector in the separate Installation Guide 8 On the 01X press the MONITOR A B button so that the lamp lights This enables monitoring of the master outputs from the DAW computer Keep in mind that this monitor setting can be changed page 96 The instructions here apply when the default setting is used Using multiple mLAN channels In the instructions above all tracks were routed to a single mLAN output pair Here we ll see how to assign audio tracks to different buses and hence separate mLAN output pairs 1 From the Devices menu select VST Outputs 2 Activate all the the output buses you intend to use Click on the power button to activate a desired bus Bus 1 the master bus is on by default and doesn t have such a butto
239. o your favorite outboard effects for example AUX 3 and 4 are used for the two internal effect blocks and those are the ones we ll cover here Here you ll route Effect 1 to the AUX 3 bus and set an appropriate level for the effect e If 88 2kHz 96kHz operation page 92 is enabled only one internal effect block is available Effect 1 Aux 3 Bl Operation CD Press the EFFECT button The button toggles between EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 Select EFFECT 1 here press DISPLAY Up but ton if necessary 2 Make sure that Patch is set to AUX 3 Bypass is off and Mix is set to 100 These are the default settings for Effect 1 Effect 2 is set to AUX 4 so you may not need to change them Patch Mix This determines the amount of the effect in the mix Generally this should be set at or near 100 You can control how much effect each channel has with the channel send level below This determines where the sound of Effect 1 will be sent in the mix Although this is normally set to AUX 3 you can also use it as a channel insert effect directly insert ing the effect to a single channel before the EQ and Dynamics processing or directly to the stereo buses Bypass Turns the effect sound on or off Remem ber that Bypass ON means the effect sound is off to hear the effect sound use the setting Use this to listen to the mix with or without the effect Mixing Tutorial 2 Effect ty
240. oi2ag soiseg fer 1 E K N pa o P wo es 39U313 34 xipuaddy Editing Effect settings The 01X can also be used to edit the plug in effects in Cubase SX Using the 01X to control the effects in Cubase SX is essen tially a three stage operation 1 setting up 2 adjusting the send levels and 3 changing the effect settings 1 Setup D Select an audio track and call up the Channel Settings window Click on the track then click the e button in the track s box Cubase SX Fie Edit Project Audio MIDI Scores Pool Transport Devices Wii e button Cubase SX File Edit Project Audio MIDI Scores Pool Transport Devices Window Help Insert Effects EQ controls Send Effects 01X Owner s Manual 2 Select the desired effects Do this within Cubase Press F6 for the Send Effects or press F7 for the Master Effects then click the black box in the effect slot to call up the pop up menu of the effect types and select the desired effect Also click the power button to turn on the effect and click the e Edit button to call up the edit window for the effect Edit button On off power button The Master Effects apply to the overall mix and do not appear in the Channel Settings window You can also turn on the effect from the 01X in the Send parame ters see below 2 Adjust the send levels CD Select the desired audio channel
241. ol Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 r x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy 18 Using Mute Solo First make sure the AUTO R W SOLO and REC RDY buttons are off and use the BANK lt gt Left Right buttons if needed to call up the desired set of tracks on the 01X To Mute a track Press the ON button of the channel you want to mute or un mute To Solo a track First press the SOLO button the button lights then press the ON button of the channel you want to solo 01X Owner s Manual Working in an Editor window For this section you should have one or more MIDI tracks and preferably at least one drum or percussion track in your song Here you ll learn how to call up the Editor window for a part and use the 01X to navigate and make simple changes MIDI parts Key Editor window Use the A v Up Down cursor buttons to select one of the MIDI tracks in the song For this example we ll select a drum track 2 Use the lt gt Left Right cursor buttons to select a part in the track These buttons let you jump between the Track list and the event display showing the recorded parts Notice that as you press the buttons each successively selected part is highlighted Once you ve selected a part in this way you can also move verti cally through the parts of other tracks by using the v Up Down cursor buttons 3 Press the EDIT button
242. onnector use a commercially available 4 pin to 6 pin TEEE 1394 cable Avoid creating a connection loop page 147 when connecting the devices mLAN benefits mLAN is a digital network designed for musical appli cations It uses and extends the industry standard IEEE 1394 high performance serial bus Only one type of cable is needed in contrast to the multiple vari eties required by conventional systems MIDI and audio signal flow can be routed freely without being limited by the actual cable configuration Signal flow between devices can be changed without having to physically reconnect the devices Cables can be connected and disconnected without turning off the power hot pluggable The isochronous data transfer used by IEEE 1394 is a transfer method that guarantees the right to transmit or receive data at fixed intervals 125 microseconds This is ideal for transfer of realtime data such as audio Q ACTIVE lamp This lights to indicate the 01X functions as an mLAN device Even if an mLAN cable is not connected this lamp stays lit If an error occurs during mLAN operation the light turns off PHANTOM 48V switch This switch supplies phantom power to MIC LINE XLR jacks 1 and 2 Turn this switch on if you are using con denser microphones requiring external 48V power with MIC LINE INPUT XLR jacks 1 and 2 N CAUTION e Make sure to turn this switch off if a device not requiring an exte
243. opriate settings as needed Page 3 Pre Post Page 4 FX bus Recording Playback Remote Control 3 Change the effect settings CD Press the EFFECT button Each press of the EFFECT button toggles between MFX Master and FX Send 2 Use the channel 1 knob to select the desired effect 1 8 The effect name is shown at the top of the LCD If the effect slot has no effect Off No Effect is shown 3 Use the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons to select the effect parameter pages Some effects have few pages 3 or 4 others have many Some effects such as Steinberg Step Filter fea ture several dozen parameter pages 4 Use the knobs to adjust the parameters a gt You can also select plug in instrument channels for audio pro cessing EQ and effects See the Hint above Controlling effects for plug in instruments For ease in editing you may want to call up the particular effect edit window so that you can see the parameters in Cubase SX as you tweak them For the Send Effects click the appropriate e button in the right column of effects in the Channel Settings win dow For the Master Effects press F6 then click the appropriate e button 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 72 i z d gt Reference Appendix 81 Recording Playback Remote Control Other control features 3 In the chart next to the button you wi
244. or has been triggered With a fast attack time the sig nal is compressed almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected dB dB 20 4 10 0 Knee knee5 10 nee 20 4 zig Expansion ratio 2 1 Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee hard J Threshold 10dB i Threshold 20dB Output Level Output Level Iiri ea a P E 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 410420 Input Level Input Level An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material 122 01X Owner s Manual Expander EXP parameters Threshold THRESH determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter Ratio controls the amount of expansion the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expande
245. or the desired channel 27 select NONE 9 NONE AD1 2 AD7 S FX2 A id The same input signal can be simultaneously routed to several different 44 1kHz 48kHz mode inp t channels 4 No only The Input Patch settings made here can be stored to the Input Patch Library see below 4 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY Determines the Library number Preset Patch numbers are indicated by aster O 00 32 isks in the display and cannot be changed Library number 00 is read only No Library number and contains the default settings for the Patch By using Recall below to call up this Patch you can restore Input Patch settings to their initial default state 1 4 Title Edit Determines the title name of the Patch Library No For calling up the selected Patch The confirmation prompt can be turned on 5 RECALL off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page 95 Yes S An Input Patch is stored to internal memory in the Input Patch Library Up to 32 Input Patch can be stored The confirmation prompt can be turned on off as desired See Store Confirmation on page 95 6 STORE A CAUTION Yes 65 e Any and all data in the Store destination will be lost when executing the Store operation Make sure to save and archive important data to com puter using the Studio Manager program page 9 7 CLEAR This deletes the selected Input Patch Yes 01X Owners Manual Basics Section Before Using Getting Started Reference
246. output to the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack SS D 2 e D N D rr E STEREO STEREO BUS L STEREO STEREO BUS R NS amp 3 3 33 LT INSERT SON LEVEL BAL STEREO L e all m e B a mn gt h h r i INE l stereo n Di ATT 4BAND EQ namics H alo E L gt METERS 2a Gain Reduction 8 Studio Manager only z a ow o gt amp Rec bus output channel This is a stereo output channel that processes the signals sent from each channel to the rec bus It provides a four band EQ and dynamics processor identical to those pro 3 vided on the input channels The output signal of the rec D bus channel is sent via the master level output patch sec tion to the various output jacks The master level of the rec bus can be controlled by using the channel 1 fader when MASTER layer in the MIXER LAYER is seleced in Internal mode STEREO STEREO BUS R STEREO STEREO BUS L AUX 1 RECBUS BUS L RECBUS BUS R AUX2 AUX 3 FX1 AUX 4 FX2 METER Dru LEVEL FT RECBUS L DY namics A gt i1 T METER E md av i li RECBUS R namics T s Ht ta gt Gain Reduction 3 Studio Manager only 30 01X Owner s Manual AUX buses 1 through 4 The signals sent from each channel to AUX buses 1 6 pass throu
247. over Dynamics processing and EQ as Indicates input level for the stereo master output S well For more details on using Studio Manager see page VAE 9 and the Studio Manager PDF manual L Ca E lt T 3 S On the 01X e E CD Set all level controls to minimum The signal level is over clipping Make sure that the gain knob for the channel is set to LINE and the channel fader and STEREO fader are at E minimum e Indicates input level for the input channels horizontally E 2 Connect the input source s a A 3 Turn on the meters La Enable metering by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the METER NAME VALUE button A m The signal level is over clipping 4 Play the source and slowly bring up the levels starting METER m m nung o munus gung i m with the gain Adjust the gain then the STEREO master fader and finally the channel fader Make sure that the level is enough to make the meter bar move but not so much k that the meter bar is pinned to the right Selects the Input Output Meter Point or pre EQ Input meter only pre fader or post fader by using the channel knobs 1 and 4 To turn the Peak Hold function on or off use channel knob 7 Adjust the level carefully so that the input level is DS not distorting When PRE EQ is selected as the INPUT METER POINT see the illustration at right the over indication of the meter
248. pe and parameters The Reverb Hall type is selected by default There are sev eral other reverb types among the presets you may want to explore these as well E Operation D Call up the Effect 1 Library page From the Effect display pages press EFFECT if nec essary use the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons to call up Effect 1 Library Using the DISPLAY v Up Down buttons This is the last page of the Effect 1 pages and you ll probably have to press the DISPLAY v Down button five times to get there You can also hold down PAGE SHIFT and press the DIS PLAY v Down button to jump through the top pages in each group in which case you can get to the Library page in two DISPLAY v Down button presses 2 Select the desired effect type Use knob 1 to select the type then press RECALL knob 5 followed by YES knob 8 to actually call it up There are 43 different preset effect types see the list on page 125 There s also memory space in the Library for 85 of your own custom settings page 36 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 72 i e o Reference Appendix 27 Hulsp 910190 uoi2ag soiseg o D E 77 r x m B 2 39U313 34 xipuaddy Mixing Tutorial 3 Edit the effect if desired Press the DISPLAY Up button repeatedly to step back through the effect parameter pages Reverb Hall has
249. pled bass drum sounds Expander for use with acoustic snare A variation on preset 25 intended for 8 A Dr SN EXPAND aum 26 Sampling SN COMP sampled snare drum sounds Soft kneed compander for use with A variation on preset 26 intended for 9 A Dr SN COMPAND S n istic enare dram 27 Mp Comp COMPAND S Sampled loops and phrases Expander for use with acoustic tom 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP Compressor for use with main vocals toms which automatically reduces the 10 A Dr Tom EXPAND volume when the tom toms are not 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28 played improving mic separation A variation on preset 28 intended for h MP Soft kneed compander for emphasizing sls GS choruses the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics It auto Expander for removing a click track that TL A Dr Overton COMPANE S matically reduces the volume when the 31 Click Erase EXPAND may bleed through from a musician s cymbals are not played improving mic headphones separation Hard kneed compander for reducing the Compressor for leveling the attack and 32 Announcer COMPAND H level of the music when an announcer 12 E B Finger COMP volume of a finger picked electric bass speaks guitar a A soft kneed compander with a slow Compressor for leveling the attack and oe Bine COMPAND release 13 E B Slap COMP volume of a slapped electric bass gui tar 34 Limiter2 COMP A peak stop comp
250. r arenei nan n t ae ROO GT EE 102 Chart Indications 2 23 55 oim aane rore e i DR D gie 84 Clipping 145 onoee nite rt TEQUE OE ORI 46 GComnipandet ntn etes Dee ERO EHE DEREN 123 CORTIpfeSSI D eei p oreet reste ER EDAD RC RE CHE EEEE 52 LR STT T 122 ConmneCtlolls i anie on aper RE C REI RR ERG eee 23 CONSO urner en entere s Or EE RR OIM ORI GO EIU 94 Controls and Connectors 54 neces ERER 16 Cubase Remote Function List insciis 108 Cursor lt gt A V Left Right Up Down buttons 20 Cycle playback necs doas eae ee rre ren ear 74 D D IN ST BUS CASCADE Digital In Stereo Bus Cascade 93 D OUT DITHER Digital Out Dither sese 93 DAW E isset cadre aad At EcL 6 DEIN terminal 45 o ect rto net ees 22 Decay Gate and Ducking assassination aaaea hats 124 Device ID susar a ec HO e in Gehe 94 Dial Rotary Encoder npe pacte 20 Digital cascade connection Basics Section 29 Digital In Stereo Bus Cascade sees 93 Digital Dn O t cscs 5 euge nane ene citi peres 93 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT isis 5 ne cic erre 95 Digital Out Dither croar ore esci t ertet 93 Digital Performer Remote Function List 112 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT jack eee 22 DIO Digital In Out nnam ere tor rer etses 93 Direct OUt Settings i c nen ave d cete oti c eee sates 90 Display anu e nom
251. r has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded almost immediately With a slow attack time the ini tial transient of a sound passes through unaffected HO Width ol Threshold cdi Aa FH E j i S Output Level T T T T T T TH T 8 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 410 20 Input Level CompanderH CPH and CompanderS CPS parameters Threshold THRESH determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter Ratio controls the amount of companding the change in out put signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level The hard compander CPH has a fixed ratio of 5 1 for expansion and the soft compander CPS has a fixed ratio of 1 5 1 for expansion Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the sig nal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected A V4 A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compres 4 Sion and expansion The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below th
252. rams or versions zm e Remote control is only possible when the version of your particular DAW application and operating system matches the system requirements For details see the separate Installation Guide E e The latest information can be found at the website below S http www yamahasynth com gt setting up e Remote control setup s Before you can use the 01 X with Cubase SX you ll need S Open or record a song in Cubase SX and as you read to specify the particular hardware control set that Cubase al through this section try out the controls with the song recognizes Ideally the song should have several tracks of audio and or MIDI data CD From the Devices menu select Device Setup Click on the Add Remove tab Device Setup Install the mLAN driver and connect your com puter to the 01X For details on setting up your computer and DAW applica tion for use with the 01X see the separate Installation Guide Here we ll show you how to set up Cubase SX for mLAN Steinberg Houston connection with the 01X Tascam US 428 Time Display Yamaha Oly Yamaha DM2000 Low Resta ok J Cancel 66 01X Owner s Manual Recording Playback Remote Control 3 Select Mackie Control or Yamaha 01X from the MIDI and audio setup list and click Add Since mLAN serves not only as a control surface for gt Cubase SX but also as a MIDI and audio interface you ll 8 Device
253. rces such as heaters or A burning item may fall over and cause a fire radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it If you notice any abnormality e fthe AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a Do not open sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or x smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or switch disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet and have the instrument modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If x Sns l S f inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel 3 7 1 2 01X Owner s Manual A CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following e When cleaning the instrument use a soft dry cloth Do not use paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Handling caution Power supply AC power adaptor ing the electric plug from th
254. read DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections Za FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain 3 HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio z HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency x LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parameter Range Description TYPE Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 126 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists MONO DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 2
255. red to the Output Patch Library page 91 7 OUTPUT PATCH DIRECT OUT POSITION E Determines the Direct Out signal source position for mLAN Out from the fol e PRE EQ lowing three options or PRE FADER PRE EQ Immediately before Input Channel EQ No 28 e POST FADER PREFADER Immediately before Input Channel fader POST FADER Immediately after Input Channel fader 8 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY Determines the Library number Preset Patch numbers are indicated by aster D 00 32 isks in the display and cannot be changed Library number 00 is read only No Library number and contains the default settings for the Patch By using Recall below to call up this Patch you can restore Output Patch settings to their initial default state 1 4 Title Edit Determines the title name of the Patch Library page 41 No 41 For calling up the selected Patch The confirmation prompt can be turned on 5 REGALI off as desired See Recall Confirmation on page 95 lis n 01X Owners Manual 91 Function Tree Function List Function name Related Block R Explanation Prompt E m settings pages diagram S D An Output Patch is stored to internal memory in the Output Patch Library Up S to 32 Output Patches can be stored The confirmation prompt
256. ressor 14 Syn Bass COMP Compressor for controlling or empha Compressor for reducing the overall vol sizing the level of a synth bass 35 Total Comp COMP ume level Use it on the stereo output p during mixdown or with paired Input or 45 Pianot COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal Output Channels color of a piano A variation on preset 35 but with more A variation on preset 15 using a deep 36 Total Comp2 COMP compression 16 Piano2 COMP threshold to change the overall attack and level 37 Gate GATE Gate template Compressor ede Ad KE 38 Ducking DUCKING Ducking template or arpeggio style backing The soun 17 E Guitar COMP color can be varied by playing different 39 A D BD GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass styles Dr drums i Compressor for acoustic guitar stroke Gate preset for use with acoustic snare 18 A Guitar COMP or arpeggio style backing 40 A Dr SN GATE dum 19 Strings COMP Compressor for use with strings 20 Strings COMP A variation on preset 19 intended for E Preset Dynamics Parameters Values fs 44 1kHz Parameter Lists No Title Type Parameter Va
257. right on the vocals save it The next time you do a song in the same style with the same instruments simply call up your tem plate and you re ready to go You can also use Scenes to create alternate mixes of the same song listening back to each in turn and choosing the best one a gt Make your life easier coordinate the Scenes with your sequencer songs Here are some tips to get you started Make sequencer templates for often used song styles and instrument combinations and create Scenes to match these templates Use MIDI to control the 01X If you make mixing changes within a song you can record program change messages in your sequencer tracks and have each Scene change called up automatically as the song plays See pages 87 94 Bl Operation CD Make all the desired mixer settings Virtually every setting you make on the mixer can be stored to a Scene This includes the channel ON but tons the level settings including the fader positions EQ Pan Aux Send levels Dynamics Effects Group Fader and Mute assignments Input Output Patch set tings and channel pairs For a detailed list of Scene data see page 85 N CAUTION Remember that Scene data does not include the GAIN knob settings If you ve made any changes to these you will have to reset them manually For this reason it may be a good idea to keep notes on those settings for example writing them down as clock settings to indicate the dial posit
258. rized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3RI Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Av Reboucas 2636 Pinheiros CEP 05402 400 Sao Paulo SP Brasil Tel 011 3085 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND
259. rk down from there In other words DECREASE the level of backing instruments and backing vocals until they blend well with the lead vocals and solo instruments Start loud and get softer that s better than engaging in an ever escalating battle of the faders e Apply EQ again page 48 Now that all instruments can be heard together you may need to redo some of your earlier EQ adjustments EQ is an effective way to clean up a mix and keep certain instru ments from clashing and muddying the sound For exam ple you may want to cut the bass of a keyboard to leave more room for the bass guitar On the other hand you can trim the high end from the bass so that it doesn t get in the way of the drums and percussion Also make sure that the overall sound is tonally balanced the low mid and high bands of the audio spectrum should contain an equal amount of sound energy e Use Solo and Mute page 51 When several instruments are mixed it can be difficult to make individual judgments about them Solo allows you to listen to channels in isolation while Mute on off lets you turn off channels you don t want to hear e Apply effects page 56 There s so much you can do right inside the 01X itself with the two built in effects units we won t even scratch the surface here For example apply reverb to add ambi ence use a short delay to double an instrument or vocal use chorus to fatten a sound or put distortion on a gui
260. rnal power supply is connected to the INPUT XLR jacks 1 or 2 f phantom power is turned on power will be supplied to both INPUT XLR jacks 1 and 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN OUT jack This is a coaxial jack phono connectors for digital input output of stereo signals They conform to the IEC 60958 consumer format For digital audio transfer use an RCA pin cable 01X Owner s Manual FOOT SWITCH jacks 1 2 Optional foot switches Yamaha FC4 FCS can be con nected here to control transport operations such as start stop For example when using remote control with the SQ01 FOOT SWITCH 1 can be used to turn the f Play button on off while FOOT SWITCH 2 can be used to control on off of the Record button The appropriate operation may not work if you use a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC4 FC5 or equivalent MIDI A IN OUT terminals MIDI B IN OUT terminals These terminals are for connection to external MIDI devices They allow you to transfer MIDI data between an mLAN connected computer and MIDI devices connected to the 01 X making the 01X a convenient dual port MIDI interface for your computer The MIDI A terminal corre sponds to mLAN MIDI port 2 and the MIDI B terminal device corresponds to mLAN MIDI port 3 page 95 D DC IN terminal Connect the AC adaptor PA 300 to this terminal N WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA 300 or an equivalent recommended b
261. rruption of data in the Flash ROM INCORRECT WORDCLOCK An inappropriate wordclock is being received from the connected device to which you are synchro nizing page 92 Initializing backup data please keep power on The Factory Set operation is being executed Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being written to Flash ROM Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM LIBRARY CATEGORY CONFLICT The channel categories e g Input Aux Out etc of the original recall store destination do not match page 103 LIBRARY FOR EFFECT1 ONLY Not available for Effect 2 LIBRARY INVALID CHANNEL You can recall or store settings for this channel LIBRARY NO DATA The selected region does not contain data LIBRARY PROTECTED Can t save erase or edit the title because the song is protected LIBRARY READ ONLY Can t save erase or edit the title because the song is read only mLAN MASTER NOW This operation cannot be performed because the 01X is in mLAN Master mode page 92 mLAN SLAVE NOW This operation cannot be performed because the 01X is in mLAN Slave mode page 92 MLAN1 4 5 TX BUFFER FULL MLAN1 4 5 RX BUFFER FULL Failed to process the MIDI data because too much data was received transmitted at once NOT AUTO WORDCLOCK MODE NOW Th
262. rview of the 01X Digital cascade connection The input signal from the rear panel DIGITAL STEREO IN connector can be cascade connected directly to the ste reo bus instead of being routed through the input patch section and patched to an input channel This is convenient when you want to link an external digital mixer or similar device with the mixer section of the 01X Refer to the Digital In Stereo Bus Cascade on page 93 Oscillator The 01X contains an oscillator that allows you to select either sine wave 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz or white noise The oscillator signal can be sent to rec bus AUX buses 1 through 4 or the stereo bus Refer to the Oscillator on page 93 STEREO STEREO BUS L STEREO STEREO BUS R RECBUS BUS L RECBUS BUS R AUX 1 AUX2 AUX 3 FX1 AUX 4 FX2 OSCILLATOR o i 01X Owners Manual Before Using 99 N D 4 pz L Reference Getting Started Appendix 29 Overview of the 01X Output channel Stereo output channel This is a stereo output channel that processes the signals sent from each channel to the stereo bus Stereo faders con Buis 910199 tor the level of these outputs It provides a 4 band EQ and dynamics processor identical to those provided on the input channels The output signal of the stereo output chan nel is sent via the output patch section to the various output jacks and is also simultaneously
263. s ights EDIT Opens the Edit window for the currently selected block AUDIO MIDI LOOP Turns Loop on or off lights goes out F1 F8 F1 F8 as defined in Cubase Nuendo SHIFT F 1 Brings the Track View window to the front of the computer screen 108 01X Owner s Manual Remote Function List Button Function LED sum 4 SHIFT F2 Mee a od View window Brings the Mixer View window to the front of the com u SHIFT F3 SHIFT F3 as defined in Cubase Nuendo SHIFT F4 Closes the current window 16 SHIFT F5 SHIFT F5 as defined in Cubase Nuendo SHIFT F6 SHIFT F6 as defined in Cubase Nuendo SHIFT F7 SHIFT F7 as defined in Cubase Nuendo SHIFT F8 SHIFT F8 as defined in Cubase Nuendo GROUP F1 F8 Corresponds to 1 8 of the Channel View on the Mixer Window UNDO Executes the Undo operation SHIFT UNDO Executes the Redo operation SAVE Executes the Save operation SHIFT SAVE Executes the Revert operation restoring the status that was saved last 25 WRITE Enters a Marker at the current song position Laal Hold to continuously rewind SHIFT lt lt Moves the song position to the top of the song MARKER lt 44 Moves the song position to the previous Mar
264. s this is an invaluable guide to the mixing recording process Even experienced pros may find it useful as a refresher course since it may help to jog your memory on certain points For all 01X users it shows you concisely how to get the most out of this versa tile console E Before Recording e Reset all controls Very simple Call up Scene Library number 00 which instantly returns all settings to their zero or default values However make sure to manually reset all Gain knobs for the MIC LINE INPUTS and turn the MONITOR PHONES level down e Connect your sources page 21 Plug in your microphones keyboards guitars and what ever to the rear panel but make sure you use the right con nector for each Inputs 1 and 2 feature balanced XLR connectors for microphones with a phantom power switch Inputs 3 to 8 are TRS balanced phone jacks for line sources such as keyboards and tone generators There s even a Hi Z input on channel 8 for connecting an electric guitar or bass e Set up your monitor If you re monitoring via headphones or the monitor out puts turn up the MONITOR PHONES knob Make sure you ve set up a suitable amp speaker system too Set the STEREO fader to or near the maximum of 0 dB The 01X features two selectable and adjustable monitor settings switchable with the MONITOR A B button or from the Utility mode allowing you to toggle monitoring between the DAW s sound via mLAN or the internal sounds p
265. s 1 4 RECALL Source for Recall operation STORE Destination for Store operation 38 01X Owner s Manual SCEME LIBRARY SCEME Ho 811 IMSERT EXIT DK 82 PIRitial Data a T Channel knob 7 8 D Basic Operations F Page Ex EQ LOW REMOTE Multi Channel Selected Channel EG LOW OFF 8 2 125 42 1 SEL CH1 gt Q EQ LOW EQ 0OH ATT Fader Channel knob SEL lt CH1 gt EQL F EGL G LEVEL 6 3 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 3 05 3 95 6 6 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 4 85 3 05 3 65 3 6 ATT EGL G 8 2 B 11 Fader NAME VALUE EGL F EGL G 128 42 1 SEL CHI gt LEUEL 6 3 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 3 05 3 95 6 6 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 4 85 3 05 3 65 3 6 CHL CH2 CHS CH4 CHS CHE CHF L L r 2 1 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 9 8 4 1 2 L 1 INTERNAL H L Channel knob 1 CH3 CH4 CHS CHE EQL G EQL G EQL G EGL G A 1 1 1 H SELECTED L CHANNEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL d 6 3 3 05 3 95 6 6 4 85 3 05 3 65 3 6 NAME VALUE SCENE B B 04 11 2 0A Fader LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 6 3 3 05 3 95 6 6 4 85 3 05 3 65 3 6 UTILITY EQ PAN DYNAMICS SEND GROUP Effect REMOTE G INTERNAL EFFECT E EFFECTi YPECREWERB HALL SCENE
266. s signal source points The PRE sends pre fader sig PRE POST N OD FOS nals and the POST sends post fader signals c e ES ON OFF Selected Channel only E DIG ON OFF Determines whether Aux Send is on or off The channel is muted with the Off No Lr setting 7 DYNAMICS INTERNAL SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS ON OFF PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A v Determines whether Dynamics is on or off Parameters depend on the 3 Dynamics Types selected in the Library as follows Dynamics is not available 2 for the ST IN channels e x z Dynamics Compressor Compander Gate Knob Type Expander Ducking QD Parameter 1 THRESH THRESH THRESH 3 No Parameter 2 RATIO RATIO RANGE 4 Parameter 3 ATTACK ATTACK ATTACK 5 Parameter 4 RELEASE RELEASE DECAY 6 Parameter 5 GAIN GAIN HOLD 7 Parameter 6 KNEE WIDTH KEY IN 8 Parameters 1 6 Selected Channel only For adjusting the Dynamics parameters 1 through 6 individually No DYNAMICS LIBRARY Selected Channel only PAGE SHIFT DISPLAY A v Determines the Library number Preset Dynamics numbers are indicated by 1412 N 11 D amp o 5 asterisks in the display and cannot be changed E 8 1j 14J Title Edit Determines the title name of the Dynamics Library No 41 100 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List Function name Related Block settings Explanation D pages diagram For calling up the selected Dynami
267. se features useful as creative com posing and arranging tools as well for example in programming mutes and fades on the fly as the tracks play back 8 01X Owner s Manual Powerful software applications Included with your 01X are a variety of useful plug ins and software programs to help you get the most out of the mixer and your computer music system 01X Channel Module This plug in software provides at a glance control over all Dynamics and EQ processing for an 01X channel It lets you call up Dynamics and EQ Library presets from the computer tweak them using the intuitive controls and compre hensive displays save your custom settings and import export settings to and from the connected 01X In this way you can set and use the Channel Module to process your sequencer tracks on the computer and export the settings to the 01X using the hardware processing on the mixer to save processing power on your computer Plug in Effects Use these powerful tools in your sequencer or DAW for recording processing editing and mastering Vocal Rack Multi effect processor perfect for recording vocals Pitch Fix Comprehensive fix it in mix pitch editing for vocals Final Master Mastering effect w multi band compressor limiter and soft clip feature e Studio Manager for 01X This stand alone virtual mixer software is a convenient direct link between the 01X and your computer Utilizing the mLAN connection it provides virtual chan
268. sh to assign co click the Category cell From the pop up menu D S s select the desired Category Using the Function buttons eo For details on the available Categories and Com amp The eight Function buttons F1 F8 provide a powerful mands refer to the Cubase SX documentation and versatile way to customize DAW control and stream line your recording editing and mixing work Just as with pe Setup E the Key Commands these buttons can be assigned to any DM Ld i B SB Live MIDI Synth 2 desired function operation or command Used in conjunc e tion with the SHIFT button you can program up to thir teen different key commands for instant one touch control E from the 01 X What s more the two FOOT SWITCH jacks can also be assigned letting you control two separate functions with connected footswitches F1 F3 F4 EJ EJ CJ CJ TRACK MIXER LIST nooo fer 1 zt K N pa o P wo zu 3 c D Assigning the Function buttons 62 4 Next click the Command cell for the button and 1 From the Devices menu select Device Setup select the desired Command from the pop up menu 2 Select Mackie Control from the list 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above to program the other Function buttons and their SHIFT combinations em Device Setup 3 Also program the footswitches if desired User A and 3 A SB Live MIDI Synth m B correspond to FOOT SWITCH jacks A and B Ae ees
269. software DAW REMOTE A 104 Mode LOGIC REMOTE lights T For specific information on each of the DAW selec REMOTE 106 CUBASE REMOTE lights tions see page 87 REMOTE 108 SONAR REMOTE lights REMOTE 110 DIGITAL PERFORMER REMOTE lights REMOTE 112 Multi Part Editor REMOTE flashes SHIFT REMOTE 87 Stand Alone To exit from the Remote mode for Multi Part Editor press only REMOTE INTERNAL HOME NTERNAL lights Adjusts the input level for the currently selected chan m INTERNAL B Mode nels in the MIXER LAYER Each channel s level value SCENE unlights level meter is displayed To set the nominal level press the appropriate channel knob To set the default value UTILITY unlights simultaneously hold down the SHIFT button and press the appropriate channel knob SCENE SCENE lights Scene settings Saving or recalling the mixer effect SCENE C 85 parameters UTILITY UTILITY lights Global settings for the entire system remote control UTILITY D 86 MONITOR MONITOR Switches between Monitor A and B To sets the output E 96 ights unlights balance between the DAW audio and the audio of the 01X itself hold down the MONITOR button and turn knob 5 for A or 7 for B These settings can also be made in the Monitor display of Utility mode PAGE EQ EQ LOW lights EQ settings Yes INTERNAL gt EQ LOW E 96 EQ LOW MID lights INTERNAL gt EQ LOW MID 97 EQ HIGH MID INTERNAL gt EQ HIGH MID 97 ig
270. st 4 cerei perte 104 REMOTE SELECT 5 4 ciseee etie tentare nene ro en eap naa 87 Reset gt Factory Set Basics Section sss 42 Restore Factory Defaults Basics Section s 42 Rewind b tton eei nere 20 S Sample rate converter ertet a 93 SAVE DUHOM sensn idean ie EEEE 19 Savine VOUN IS ONS sasni a ea a 83 SCENE esea a E TE ENE EGE 85 SCENE D TCOM igarpen dae ove 18 SCENE EIBRARY 35 3 ei dni ter 85 SEIER tesa ERO HO OH TO DIOE 65 Scenes OLX Terminology teens 14 SCMS acta minded EPOR ver eod 95 SCRUB DUON 2 olio idR ORE NOE 20 SBEDUttOS 55 older npe Rer rore e 17 Select the Remote setting to match your sequencer 73 SELECTED CHANNEL DUON eet hnnc 19 Selected Channel mode 5 etel armen 19 Selecting and arming tracks iei oed ees 74 SEND 35529 950m e aisi d n Om EE 100 SEND 1 4 AUX Send Level 1 4 sse 100 SEND button cro ettet rerba eta ba anes 19 Serial Copy Management System sss 95 esp T Cm 6 SHIFT REMOTE FUNCTION 1 eere 87 SHIFT Button e 19 Signal flow between the 01X and the DAW on the computer Basics Section 25 NEM H M 51 SOLO DUtt nu eri tor tot Er e Fe Res ea ERE de 17 SOLO MODE 4 ue noH O EOS 96 SOEOSSABE 55 n ur di a REFORM 96 SONAR Remote Function List eese 110 Spec
271. stand that is recommended by Yamaha If a cart etc is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be cor rect at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker s may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs Some Yamaha products may have benches and or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures where applicable are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recommended NOTICE Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the man
272. sult holding down the SEL but ton for channel 4 and pressing that of channel 5 has no effect Stereo sources e When connecting stereo sources keep this logical system in mind Always connect the left signal to an odd numbered input 1 3 5 7 and its right counterpart to the adjacent even num bered input 2 4 6 8 2 Select the control assignment for the pair by pressing the appropriate knob Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel Notice that when you move one of the faders the other moves with it Also any mix settings you make for one channel are automatically made for the other channel as well N CAUTION Don t move both faders Becareful to only move one fader in a channel pair Moving both at the same time may damage the motors NOTE D To cancel the pair assignment e Simply repeat step 1 above then at the RELEASE PAIR prompt press knob 8 YES Panning Pan lets you set where the audio of a channel appears in the stereo image Normally if you ve connected a stereo source to two adjacent channels for example channels 1 and 2 you ll want to to set channel 1 hard left and chan nel 2 hard right to preserve the original stereo image Other channels can be directed left center or right or anywhere in between as desired Bl Operation D Select the desired channel by pressing the correspond
273. t the lamp flashes Press this again to execute the lights flashes Save operation lamp turns off goes out MARKER Turns the Marker on or off SHIFT MARKER Opens the Marker Option window P P lt lt Press to continuously rewind Press again to rewind more quickly When the Marker is turned on this operation moves the song position to the previous Marker SHIFT lt lt Moves the song position to the top of the song p gt Press to continuously fast forward Press again to fast forward more quickly When the Marker is turned on this operation moves the song position to the next Marker m Stops recording or playback gt Press to start playback lights rej Press this to start song recording The gt Play and 8 Rec lamp are turned on dur lights ing recording 9 ZOOM Switches between Scroll lamp lights Zoom lamp is off and Nudge lamp flashes li UMS x ash ies FOOT SWITCH 1 Controls the function set in the Preferences in Digital Performer FOOT SWITCH 2 Controls the function set in the Preferences in Digital Performer SCRUB Turns Scrub on and off When turned on you can use the dial to move the song position lights 25 y gp 112 01X Owner s Manual Remote Function List Button Function LED eed 4 PAN mode PAN or SHIFT PAN gt Knob lights 26 E Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 3 Kno
274. ta flow between the 01X and the computer the changes you make to levels and parameter values are immediately mirrored in the LCD of the 01 X giving you intuitive and instant editing in real time without having to check the com puter display Drums Drums SteelG SteelG CleanG Clean DistGt DistGt PAH PAH PAH PAH PAH PAH PAH PAH lu 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 HHI oooloooo omwa v vee 01x Econo olon c c c 9 o o o o o o o c G h be fe Lel 3j 9999 99999 parameter names values 01X Remote Display information 7 R 6 n Tal aleae tai O ooo OO O O Computer DAW 01X Owner s Manual Q Since control of the DAW mixer channels and 01X channels is simultaneous and bi directional you can record level changes in the song data and have them reflected automatically in the 01X faders providing full mixer automation Use the faders to record level changes in the DAW channels 01X Computer DAW During song play back the faders on the 01X move in response to the recorded level changes T q 01X Computer DAW NOTE L For details on the functions in the Remote mode see the Remote Function List page 104 Depending on your particular DAW not all control features may be implemented and some
275. tar track The sky s the limit and if you need more effects you can patch in your own external processors page 60 e Fader groups and Mute groups page 64 The four fader groups of the 01X allow you to control sev eral faders at the same time using just one fader This can be used to create submixes within the main mix allowing you to easily adjust all drum levels keyboard levels or vocal levels The 01X also has four mute groups as well letting you instantly turn several channels on or off together e Scenes page 65 This powerful feature sometimes called snapshot automa tion lets you save all settings in a mix and call them up whenever you need them Not only is it ideal for instantly switching between different projects and songs it allows you to create mixing templates for different recording applications and even set up different trial mixes for a sin gle song and later choose the best one Getting Started e Computer recording and sequencing The 01X is especially versatile in a sequencing environ ment With the digital output you can record up to 24 bit 96 kHz audio to your computer page 72 With the maxi mum 24 inputs 28 including the aux stereo inputs you ve got plenty of mixing space for your computer s audio outs plus your MIDI instruments page 67 And with the comprehensive control surface page 104 you can control virtually all important operations on your favorite sequencer right from
276. the conventional configuration In this condition the audio may sound squashed or unnatural out of phase when heard in stereo When using such devices set the Phase parameter page 99 to Reverse MIC LINE INPUT jack 8 HI Z This is a high impedance 1 4 phone input jack unbalanced The nominal input level is 46 to 4dB An instrument with high output impedance such as an electric guitar or bass with passive type pickups can be connected here This jack corre sponds to ADS of the Input Patch settings pages 27 61 88 STEREO AUX OUT jacks These are 1 4 phone output jacks unbalanced that output the signals of the stereo bus rec bus or AUX bus 1 2 MONITOR OUT jacks These are 1 4 phone output jacks unbalanced for con nection to your monitor setup such as a stereo system or powered speakers O PHONES jack This is a 1 4 TRS phone output jack for connecting a set of stereo headphones for monitoring 01X Owners Manual 21 Reference Getting Started Basics Section Before Using Appendix Controls and Connectors ow 1 a i c 17 c a s L 39U313 34 pauejs Duman uoi2ag soiseg xipuaddy 22 mLAN IEEE 1394 connectors 1 2 For connecting mLAN devices or IEEE 1394 compatible FireWire i Link devices via standard IEEE 1394 6 pin cables The operation is identical no matter which terminal is used mLAN 1 or mLAN 2 If the target device has a 4 pin c
277. the 01X That just about covers mixing basics and some of the more important features of the 01 X Although not a complete guide to audio mixing it should be enough to get you started For more information check out the publications in your local music bookstore or try a good technical bookstore Best yet search the Internet you ll find it a wonderful resource for recording and mixing Now go on and explore the rest of the Guided Tour including the page references given above 01X Owners Manual Before Using Basics Section s 99 72 i e o Reference Appendix 45 Mixing Tutorial Mixing Tutorial EB G2 e D NOTE c z e The example displays are generally taken from the Value mode c Be sure to enter the INTERNAL mode before you start the following tutorial E Setting input levels and viewing the Indicates input level for the input channels Vertically e 2 meters ew e L L4 Setting the input levels is a straightforward process but SOS e zi we ve included two separate sets of instructions here The CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CHE CH first involves only the 01X while the second shows how to B 7 m 2 4 g 2 9 N 1 758 4 150 3 1 2 8 4 _ e use your computer and the included Studio Manager soft ware to set levels With Studio Manager you can see the amp levels big and bright on your computer monitor plus have L intuitive control
278. the output level of each device Turning the power to the computer and mLAN devices on or off Connecting or disconnecting an IEEE1394 mLAN cable e Starting or quitting the OS CD Press the STANDBY ON switch A splash screen is displayed The Inter nal mode Home screen appears next AM STANDBY ON Q MONITOR PHONES V Lf GE i MAX 2 Raise the sound system volume to a rea sonable level 8 Turn the 01X s MONITOR PHONES knob clockwise to set an appropriate vol ume level Basics Section Overview of th This section gives you an overview of the 01X s features The following diagram shows the various component sections or blocks of the 01X mixer effects and remote control It also indicates the mLAN interface capabili ties both audio and MIDI gt a E o o amp o ca Signal flow between the 01X and the DAW on the computer When using a DAW other than SQ01 V2 E 1 In Macintosh OS 9 or earlier MIDI data is transferred between drivers 4 You can monitor the output directly monitor cascade through the con 2 and applications by OMS Open Music System nected speaker system headphones according to the MONITOR A B e 2 Windows only setting if the stereo master output of the DAW is set to the last two e GB available channels the last two numbered channels specified with 3 Figures in parentheses indicate the number of available channels when mLAN Auto
279. the soft parts louder and the loud parts softer For this reason it is ideal for smoothing out wild fluctuations in level such in a vocalist who both whis pers and screams in the same song Once the audio is compressed the level can be raised so that the loud parts are as loud as before or even louder and the soft parts can be clearly heard including your vocalist s breathing Since a smoother dynamic range is easier to record you ll probably want to apply compression while record ing Don t overdo it though You should only apply compression to the source enough to tame the levels keeping the sound relatively natural and uncolored Process it later after it s recorded if necessary Compression also can be used to change and enhance certain sounds such as putting a mean attack on a wimpy snare drum adding crunch bite and sustain to a mild mannered electric guitar or making a soft lead vocal sound urgent and up close wr e For the most natural transparent sound use compression on individ ual instruments rather than the overall mix The effects will be less audible 01X Owner s Manual B Operation D Select the desired channel by pressing the correspond ing SEL button 2 Press the DYNAMICS button 3 Press SELECTED CHANNEL to switch between the Single Channel and Multi Channel modes The Selected Channel mode lets you see and edit all Dynamics parameters for the selected channel
280. ticular DAW software turning the effects on off and changing the effect type may be possible only from the computer If the effect type cannot be changed by remote operation when a mes sage in the DAW software indicates you are attempting to apply an invalid effect such as applying a mono effect for a stereo connection you should change the effect from the computer If you cannot control the level remotely after adding a MIDI track adjust it once from the computer and try again During automation the LEDs may not light correctly If the Scrub function does not work properly when it is on turn it off The particular plug in effect you are using must be compatible with the Remote function When the number of available pages is reduced when changing effects make sure to select a valid page number for the new effect by using the DISPLAY A v Up Down buttons beforehand Even if you keep pressing the SEL button while holding down the AUTO R W button it will be ineffective from the second time Press the SEL button after pressing the AUTO R W button again Do not use the Master STEREO fader while the Flip function is active Make sure to use the Latch mode when recording mute on off data to automation When playing back song data for the first time after starting Cubase the automation data and audio data may not be synchronized Stop playback once and try playing back again Appendix E Preset EQ Library
281. time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be com pressed incorrectly Threshold THRESH determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter Ratio controls the amount of compression the change in out put signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in output level Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between uncompressed and com pressed signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Out Gain GAIN sets the compressor s output signal level Compression tends to reduce the average signal level Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropri ate level for the next stage in the audio path Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compress
282. ting made takes place immedi ately For certain parameters the confirmation prompt can be enabled or disabled as desired see page 95 E Indicates page numbers for relevant operations and details regarding the parameter F Indicates the portion in the Block Diagram at the end of the manual to which the parameter applies 01X Owner s Manual Function Tree Function List E INTERNAL MODE INTERNAL gt i Knob Function name Explanation Prompt Related Block settings pages diagram 5 o SCENE MODE SCENE DISPLAY v Ss or SCENE SCENE SCENE ES 1 SCENE LIBRARY Determines the Library number Preset Scene numbers and write protected Scenes are indicated by asterisks in the display and cannot be changed see K Protect on page 86 Library number 00 is read only and contains the B D 00 99 default settings for all parameters By using Recall below to call up this No 36 R Library number Scene you can restore all 01X settings to their initial default state This Scene 65 eS can also be called up via an external device by sending an appropriate program S change message according to the setting in Program Change Assign Table 2 see page 94 1j 14J Title Edit Determines the title name of the Library Scene page 36 41 5 o For calling up the selected Scene When recalling a Scene the corresponding sS MIDI program change message is transmitt
283. tion With AUTO R W on the button is lit press the ON button of the channel repeatedly if necessary until only R Read is on in Cubase SX 9 Play back the section to hear the newly edited changes Editing EQ settings In this section we ll be making edits to individual tracks again but this time from the Channel Settings window This window not only has a volume fader and pan control it also features a complete EQ control window and gives you basic controls for all your effects Keep in mind that EQ can only be used on audio tracks D Call up the Project window 2 Select the desired audio track Do this within Cubase SX or press the SEL button of the corresponding channel 3 Click on the e button in the selected track box This calls up the Channel Settings window for the channel Cubase SX File Edit Project Audio MIDI Scores Pool Transport Devices Wi Cubase SX Project On the Move cpr e button Cubase SX File Edit Project Audio MIDI Scores Pool Transport Devices Window Help C Cubase SX Project On the Move cpr FIT puil bir E INT LIN 1 R je yy BEES v i t EI Bj BOS BSI EDS lt Bax Is Guitar RJ w Me f E E Io ER RSI Naturally you can use the corresponding fader and knob on the 01X here to control volume and pan respectively a gt Notice that you can select different tracks here by pressing the appropriate SEL button without
284. tion mLAN MIDI 1 Remote control Mode can be selected mLAN MIDI 2 Direct connection to MIDI A terminal mLAN MIDI 3 Direct connection to MIDI B terminal mLAN MIDI 4 Studio Manager Remote control Mode is fixed to GENERAL This is used for control of the Multi Part Editor or for mLAN MIDI 5 recalling Library Scenes by program change mes sages Selection between the two is done from the Utility menu 3 Data Format The MIDI format to be used for each function is shown below The explanations here pertain only to changing 01X Scenes via the mLAN MIDI Port 5 Function Format GENERAL 01X Remote General format LOGIC Special format Remote Control CUBASE Special format SONAR Special format DIGITAL PERFORMER Special format Studio Manager Special format Recalling of Library Scenes Program Change messages 3 1 Channel Messages Command rx tx function For switching the Library Scene Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx tx memory MIDI Data Format 3 2 System Common Messages No relevant messages 3 3 System Real time Messages Command rx tx function FE ACTIVE SENSING i is checking MIDI cable connec FF RESET rx Clear the running status 3 4 System Exclusive Messages No relevant messages 4 Format Details 4 1 Program Change These messages are effective only when the SHIFT REMOTE function is set to NO ASSIGN SCENE CTL
285. tn erbe EE Hen 16 DISPLAY A V Up Down buttons eene 17 Display Indications Basics Section sss 38 Display Me8Sage88 a2 ccr d emet oct GE ere 143 DISPEAY SEFTINGS 5 5 cu eremi erre tces 95 buts 93 DUCKING A M 124 DYNAMICS eden aethera mi ree ERE AER ON 100 YMA CS rr EE 52 DYNAMICS butt h inrer tte erai n HER EE OES ERE 19 DYNAMICS LIBRARY nri Es 100 Dynamics Eibraty rre rtr nire tds 118 Dynamics Parameters cient ee etnia tetro nne 122 Dynamics Parameters Values eee 119 E EDI button 25 antes oro iternm dtr M 19 EEBEG I noinen nte dte n rexit b as 102 EEBEGT D ttOli 5 52am donde Dreier ds 19 EFFECT PATCH cniinne ar an 139 Effect ET T 57 Effect type and parameters erectis 57 BEBECTI 2 BYPASS pittore 102 BEBECTI 2LIBRARY 2 2 2 0 torii etie 103 BEBECTI 2 MIX trt reete 102 BEBECTI 2PARAMETER eei 103 BEBECTI 2 PATCH 5 2 n tci rhet 102 BEBECTI 2 TYPE 3 2 nnd tec ores 102 Effects Library 2 52 9nmteimetevimeee nime 125 Effects Parameters cas ororo e ime t eioee tem eie 126 Entering Characters Basics Section sss 41 EQX EQ Tips eetri ania aasa 48 EQ DUttONS iiis esaeen ase EE RENE 19 EQHIGH torsen fer ere erc HEURE eris 98 EQ HIGH MID rroaren anan reise pet pene 97 BO LIBRARY eet HE DEED eere 99 BQ LIDPaty x etum eni RES 115 EQ LOW d
286. to mention its transparent seamless blend of software and hardware the 01X is an excellent control console for recording with an audio MIDI sequencer and is ideal for virtually any music creation pro duction application In order to get the most out of your new 01X and its sophisticated functions we suggest you read through this manual thoroughly Also keep it in a safe convenient place so that you can regularly refer to it when necessary Accessories Check to see that you have everything listed here L1 AC Adaptor PA 300 O CD ROM x 2 O Installation Guide O Owner s Manual O mLAN cable L1 Quick Reference for Playback Recording O User s Card containing the serial number for the included Plug in software effects Included CD ROMs These CD ROMs contain special software for use with this instrument They include the SQ01 V2 a full featured audio MIDI sequencer mixer for comprehensive music production Studio Manager which gives you comprehensive and intuitive mixer editing tools and Multi Part Editor for MOTIF RACK editing the Mixing parameters of Songs and Patterns of the Yamaha MOTIF RACK Included also are plug in software effects that provide effect processing using the processing power of your computer For details see the separate Installation Guide or the online manuals included with the software B 01X Owner s Manual About This Manual This manual consists of the followi
287. ton Function LED page 114 c Forward or Fast Forward When the Marker is turned on this operation moves the song 6 gt gt M 33 o position to the next Marker 5 Moves the song position to the end of the song When the Marker is turned on this oper g SHIFT gt gt o ation opens the window for entering the Marker m Stops recording or playback ea gt Press to start playback lights 33 rej Press this to start song recording The gt Play and 8 Rec lamp are turned on dur lights ing recording 9 SHIFT Starts recording automation The gt button lights while data is being recorded 2 ZOOM Turns Zoom on and off lights S FOOT SWITCH 1 Foot SW A as defined in SONAR 2 FOOT SWITCH 2 Foot SW B as defined in SONAR S Dial Controls one of these three functions Scrub moving of the song position or data entry Turns Scrub on and off When Scrub is on the dial can be used for Scrub playback A SCRUB When Scrub is off the dial is used to move the song position lights goes out 20 SHIFT SCRUB Activates data entry for the dial flashes Ks TRACK mode SHIFT PAN Track Parameter mode fone t SHIFT PAN gt SHIFT PAN Selected Channel mode 9 e Knobs 1 8 turning For editing parameters 18 Knobs 1 8 pressing For editing parameters Resets the parameter value to its default 22 PAN mode PAN lights e PAN gt PAN Selected Channel mode of PAN S
288. tt te tette teret Ea retener nte Installation Guide e Checking words and terminology used with the 01X sss nnne nettes 01X Terminology page 14 eMemory strbeture ofthe LBIbrarles ah e rh eh ote tau aided tu en diat tee aee EE alae USES REN ERE page 36 Checking information on the mLAN MIDI ports ecccssseseeseeseseeseseseeseeeseseeseseseeeeseseeecaesesesacaesnseecaneneeteeeeees mLAN MIDI INFORMATION page 95 Bi Quick solutions eMeanirng or ihe display MeSSageS e o ete te te ete t p ee e e n teste OH PE C tk De ct aed ena casual page 143 Isis sls i eto Oto t RH uid N teu uico caer ad Dana Lir EURO LO SU page 144 01X Owner s Manual Table of Contents Before Using 14 Recording Playback Remote Control 66 ENDE I m n Ue UD stsica Ante bear enr danda Ce itti tase 66 01X Terminology sss 14 Working in the Project window 73 Controls and Connectors 16 Working in the Mixer window 75 Connections ses 23 WOPR iiin ds A tOMAt OM oisinn aagi 77 Setting UJ eerie 24 Editing EQ settings c 79 Editing Effect settings eee eee eee eee eee 80 Basics Section 25 Other control features sssssessssss 82 Overview of the 0 eee 25 TOOTH o7 Reference B Internal effects 1 2 sess 31 Function Tree Function List 84
289. ufacturer s warranty and are therefore the owners responsibility Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them meet these goals In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargeable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years When replace ment becomes necessary contact a qualified service represen tative to perform the replacement This product may also use household type batteries Some of these may be rechargeable Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged When installing batteries do not mix batteries with new or with batteries of a different type Batteries MUST be installed cor rectly Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in over heating and battery case rupture Warning Do not attempt to disassemble or incinerate any battery Keep all batteries away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area Note Check with any retailer of household type batteri
290. ulti effects in vocal recording sese Vocal Rack Vocal Rack Owner s Manual PDF e Jsing m ltiseffects in masteritig eoce ee ertt te ERE it eee ree Hus Final Master Final Master Owner s Manual PDF e Editing and viewing the 01X settings on the COMPUTET sese eee eee eee eee Studio Manager Studio Manager Owner s Manual PDF Saving the 01X s settings to a computer 0 eee eseceeseseseeseseseeseseseseneecseseseceeecseseceeneseetenenees Studio Manager Studio Manager Owner s Manual PDF Transferring settings between the 01X Channel Module and the Studio Manager yod Studio Manager 01X Channel Module 01 X Channel Module Owner s Manual PDF 01X Owner s Manual E Saving data v Backing p system data enn en tod ed iege Heat qur HC Ue UO OUR C HR nites BACKUP SHIFT UTILITY page 86 e Saving recalling deleting groups of programmed settings Library esee LIBRARY page 36 eiDsing tlie channel Library eessen aeaee ei rer erri ede CO Rr RE HERR SHIFT SELECTED CHANNEL page 103 Saving tlie 01X s settirigs to COmpllter sssrinin tiini Studio Manager Studio Manager Owner s Manual PDF E Protecting data from accidental loss e Setting a Scene so that data cannot be deleted edited Scene Protect sss PROTECT page 86 Specifying a certain channel to not be affected by recalling a Scene Recall Safe RECALL SAFE page 86 e Specifying the stereo channel to
291. ur vocals and other instruments Naturally all Dynamics EQ and effect processing are available for this 24 channel setup Finally you can also use this same configuration for mixdown returning the entire sound with processing to the computer for mastering Application examples 3 Recording mixer monitor mixer with use of 01X Channel Module software and Studio Manager This advanced hardware software hybrid system combines the conveniences of computer based mixing processing with the intuitive control surface and digital processing of the 01X Computer HDR Wave EQ Dynamics EQ Dynamics Studio Manager Monitor Out In this application the 01 X Channel Module plug in and the Studio Manager software both included with the 01X are used to link mixing and processing operations between the 01X and your computer The result is a transparent exceptionally easy to use hardware software combination The panel controls on the 01X and the controls of Studio Manager on the computer are linked directly adjusting a parameter on one changes that of the other The Studio Manager has conventional channel strips that you can con trol from the 01X It also has special windows for the Dynamics processing EQ and effects The EQ window for example features a frequency response graph that changes as you make the settings very intuitive and very easy With this configuration you can use the channel process ing
292. utput reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 Reverb and chorused reverb balance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV FLG 0 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 all reverb 100 all flange FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV gt FLANGE One
293. v Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Sub roto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 06
294. verter Switches or faders connected with dotted line mean the set ting value for one is linked to the other e For information on the entire signal flow of the 01X refer to the Block Diagram at the end of this owner s manual Overview of the 01X Getting Started page 61 Input patch Reference page 88 The Input Patch section allows assignment of input signals to input channels 1 through 8 and stereo input channels STI 1 2 The following types of input signals can be selected MIC LINE INPUT 1 8 DIGITAL STEREO IN EFFECT FX 1 2 Return signals from internal effects 1 2 ST IN only MIC LINE INPUT py ayroy Oo 48V AD T e AD ie LINE MIC INPUT 1 8 AD INPUT A AD ees LINE MIC Hiz y 9 1 2 INPUT 8 ONLY E E DIGITAL STEREO IN z 2 DIN Z COAXIAL 9 SRC OZ UR S 5 sTIN1 2 to BUS CASCADE kK 2 FX E EFFECT 1 WE S 1 o gt AUX3 el o 1 l EFFECT FX1 INSERT SEND 252 FX EFFECT 2 METER AUX4 E i O d EA EFFECT LZ i pe insert sup 262 EFFECT is available in 48kHz 44 1kHz mode only 1 Wordclock 96kHz 88 2kHz 16 3 Studio Manager only 01X Owners Manual Before Using ez 99 77 o 4 pz L Reference Getting Started Appendix 2 usn 910199 SS D 2
295. while the releasing of the fader is called touch out The 01X registers touch in when a fader starts moving and registers touch out not at the physical release of the fader but after the elapsed Timeout time page 88 The SEL button flashes when touch in starts when automation recording is active You can manually touch out or stop recording automation before the Time out by pressing the SEL button It is also possible to start touch in manually without moving the fader by pressing the SEL button when the AUTO EDIT button is ON 01X Owners Manual Reference Getting Started Basics Section Before Using Appendix 15 Controls and Connectors Controls and Connectors Top Panel ow 3 a i c 17 c ze s L NOTE For details on the functions in the Remote mode see the Remote Function List page 104 Depending on your particular DAW not all control features may be implemented and some buttons may be assigned different functions Refer to the owner s manual of your particular DAW for specific instructions and setups e Remote control is only possible when the version of your particular DAW application and operating system conforms to
296. y 42 Basic Operations 4 Enter the letters numbers or symbols by turning the channel knob 5 5 Turn any of the channel knobs 2 4 to move the cur sor to the position of the next character 6 Enter the other characters by repeating steps D 5 above Insertion Deletion of Characters Channel knob 6 is assigned to Insertion INSERT and Deletion DELETE Turn the channel knob 6 to select the Insertion INSERT or Deletion DELETE function To insert delete a particular character move the cursor to the desired position in steps 3 and above and press channel knob 6 Note that the DELETE operation does not delete the character before the cursor but the flashing character on the cursor 7 After entering the characters press channel knob g p 8 OK to execute the operation N CAUTION Never attempt to turn off the power while data is being writ ten to Flash ROM while an EXECUTING BACKUP PLEASE KEEP POWER ON message is shown Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data and may cause the system to freeze due to corruption of data in the Flash ROM 01X Owner s Manual Factory Set Restore Factory Defaults This let you restore the 01 X s default settings Once you edit any settings the corresponding factory defaults will be overwritten and lost Use the procedure below to restore the factory default settings caution
297. y Yamaha The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the 01X and may even pose a serious shock hazard ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE 01X IS NOT IN USE P STANDBY ON switch This switches the power between ON and STANDBY off caution Make sure to follow the procedures described in the Setting Up section page 24 when turning the power of the 01X on or off Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position elec tricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the 01X for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC out let Connections CAUTION o Before connecting the 01X to other electronic components turn off the power to all the components Before turning the power on or off to all components set all volume levels to minimum 0 Otherwise electrical shock or damage to the components may occur The following diagram shows a typical example of connections to the 01 X Connect your microphones instru ments and external devices as shown in this diagram IEEE 1394 equipped Computer Foot Switch FC5 or FC4 Microphone MIC LINE INPUT 1
298. you ll discover that it s also a convenient compre S nat E hensive control surface for your audio sequencer or DAW digital audio workstation The 01X gives you tape recorder style transport controls a wealth of buttons for navigating and controlling your song and most importantly lets you use the faders knobs and channel buttons SEL buttons and ON buttons for mixing E your sequencer tracks in real time Full automation with moving faders is implemented and you can even 3 change and automate EQ and effect settings for each track In short the 01X provides a completely transparent hard Ca ware link with your computer based music production o S Templates are included for most major DAW applications and MIDI audio sequencers including Cubase SX SL Nuendo Logic SONAR and Digital Performer Naturally the Yamaha SQ01 V2 is supported as well Throughout this section we ve used Cubase SX for the examples but most or all of these control features are available for the other supported sequencers as well If you re familiar with the concepts and basic functions covered here and are aware how they apply to your own particular sequencer you should have no problem learning from these instruc tions no matter what sequencer you use o 1 zt K N o P wo NOTE The example below uses mLAN Auto Connector Keep in mind that not all control features are implemented in all compatible software prog
299. z 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 128 01X Owner s Manual Parameter Lists SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect 2 Parameter Range Description E FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed o DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time ea WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSHF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency S EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain B EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth N HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency 8 HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain s PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser E Parameter Range Description e FREQ 0 0540 00 Hz Modulation speed g DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth z FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback e

Northern Modular Telephone Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents